SIEMENS

COROS

Communications Processor

Manual

6AV1970-ONQOO-OAA2 Release 01

Contents Warning Information Suggestions/Corrections C79000-R8576-C217

Manual C79000-B8576-C217-01 Communications Processor CP 526

Contents

Introduction Ordering Data Technical Description of the CP 526 Module Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board Example of an Application Program for the CP 526 System Restrictions

3
4

5 6

7
8
9
Ap endix
AV1 970-ONQ00-OAA2, Release 01

A P 526 Error Messages B Reference Literature

l '

10

Warning
Risks involved in the use of so-called SIMATIC-compatible modules of non-Siemens manufacture
"The manufacturer of a product (SIMATIC in this case) is under the general obligation to give warning of possible risks attached to his product. This obligation has been extended in recent court rulings to include parts supplied by other vendors. Accordingly, the manufacturer is obliged to observe and recognize such hazards as may arise when a product is combined with products of other manufacture.

For this reason, we feel obliged to warn our customers who use SlMATlC products not to install so-called SlMATlCcompatible modules of other manufacture in the form of replacement or add-on modules in SlMATlC systems.
Our products undergo a strict quality assurance procedure. We have no knowledge as to whether outside manufacturers of so-called SIMATIC-compatible modules have any quality assurance at all or one that is nearly equivalent to ours. These so-called SIMATIC- compatible modules are not marketed in agreement with Siemens; we have never recommended the use of so-called SIMATIC-compatible modules of other manufacture. The advertising of these other manufacturers for so-called SIMATIC-compatible modules wrongly creates the impression that the subject advertised in periodicals, catalogues or at exhibitions had been agreed with us. Where so-called SIMATIC-compatible modules of non-Siemens manufacture are combined with our SlMATlC automation systems, we have a case of our product being used contrary to recommendations. Because of the variety of applications of our SlMATlC automation systems and the large number of these products marketed worldwide, we cannot give a concrete description specifically analyzing the hazards created by these so-called SIMATIC-compatible modules. It is beyond the manufacturer's capabilities to have all these so-called SIMATICcompatible modules checked for their effect on our SlMATlC products. If the use of so-called SIMATIC-compatible modules leads to defects in a SlMATlC automation system, no warranty for such systems will be given by Siemens.

In the event of product liability damages due to the use of so-called SIMATIC-. compatible modules, Siemens are not liable since we took timely action in warning users of the potential hazards involved in so-called SIMATIC-compatible modules."

Safety-Related Guidelines for the User

1 General
This manual provides the information required for the intended use of the particular product. The documentation is written for technically qualif~ed personnel such as engineers, programmers or maintenance specialists who have been specially trained and who have the specialized knowledge required in the field of instrumentation and control.

A knowledge of the safety instructions and warnings contained in this manual and their appropriate application are prerequisites for safe installation and commissioning as well as safety in operation and maintenance of the product described.' Only qualified personnel as defined in section 2 have the specialized knowledge that is necessary to correctly interpret the general guidelines relating to the safety instructions and warnings and implement them in each particular case.
This manual is an inherent part of the scope of supply even if, for logistic reasons, it has to be ordered separately. For the sake of clarity, not all deta~ls of all versions of the product are described in the documentation, nor can it cover all conceivable cases regarding installation. operation and maintenance. Should you require further information or face special problems that have not been dealt with in sufficient detail in this documentation, please contact your local Siemens office.
We would also po~nt that the contents of thls product documentat~on ou! shall not become a pan of or modlfy any prlor or exlstlng agreement, comm~tmentor legal relat~onsh~p. The Purcnase Agreement contarns the complete and exclus~ve obl~gat~ons S~emens. of Any statements contamed in this documentat~on not create new warrant~es restr~ct exlstlng warranty. do or the

2 Qualified Personnel
Persons who are not qualified should not be allowed to handle the equipment!system. Non-compliance with the warnings contained in this manual or appearing on the equipment itself can result in severe personal injury or damage to property. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to work on this equipment'system.

O Siemens AG

C79000-08076-C336-03

Safew-Related Gwdelrnes

Qualified persons as referred to in the safety guidelines in this manual as well as on the product itself are defined as follows: System planning and des~gnengineers who are familiar with the safety concepts of automation equipment: Operating personnel who have been trained to work with automation equipment and are conversant with the contents of the manual in as far as it is connected with the actual operation of the plant; Commissioning and service personnel who are trained to repair such automation equipment and who are authorized to energize. deenergize. clear, ground and tag circuits, equipment and systems in accordance with established safety practices.

3 Danger Notices
The notices and guidelines that follow are intended to ensure personal safety, as well as protecting the product and connected equipment against damage. The safety notices and warnings for protection against loss of life (the users or service personnel) or for protection against damage to property are highlighted in this manual by the terms and pictograms defined here. The terms used in this manual and marked on the equipment itself have the following significance:

indicates that death. severe persona; lnjury or substant~al property damage result if proper precautions are not taken.

~ndicates death. severe that personai injury or subsrantlal property damage can result if are proper precaut~ons not taken.

indicates that mlnor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

is an important information about s or the product, ~ t operat~on a part of the manual to which special attention is drawn.

Siemens AG C79000-08076-C336-03

If in this manual "Important" should appear in bold type, drawing attention to any part~cularly ~nformat~on. the definition corresponds to that of "Warning", "Caution" or *Note".

4 Proper Usage
The equipmentisystem or the system components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in combination with the equipment, components and devices of other manufacturers as far as this is recommended or permitted by Siemens. The product described has been developed, manufactured, tested and the documentation compiled in keeping with the relevant safety standards. Consequently, if the described handling instructions and safety guidelines described for planning, installation, proper operation and maintenance are adhered to, the product. under normal conditions. will not be a source of danger to property or life.

Warning
After opening the housing or the protective cover or after opening the system cabinet. certain parts of this equipment system will be accessible, which could have a dangerously high voltage level. Only suitably qualified personnel should be allowed access to this equipment system. These persons must be fully conversant with any potential sources of danger and maintenance measures as set out in this manual. It is assumed that this product be transported. stored and installed as intended. and maintamed and operated with care to ensure that the product functions correctly and safely.

Guidelines for Planning and Installing the Product

The product generally forms a part of larger systems or plants. These guidelines are ~ntendedto help integrate the product into its environment without it constituting a source of danger.

Siemens AG C79000-D8076C336-03

Saferv-Related Guldelves

The following f a c t s require particular attention:

r

Even when a high degree of safety has been deslgned into an Item of automation equipment b y means of multichannel configuration, it IS s t ~ l l imperative that the instructions contained i n this manual b e exactly adhered to. Incorrect handling can render ineffective the preventive measures incorporated into the system to protect it aga~nst dangerous faults, and even create new sources of danger.

The following advice regarding installation and commissioning of the product should - in specific cases - also be noted.

Warning
Follow strtctly the safety and accldent preventron rules that apply In each particular case. Un~ts wh~ch deslgned as bullt-n unlts may only be operated as such, and are caslng closed. table-mounted or portable equlpment only wlth ~ts In the case of equlpment w~th permanent power connect~on a which 1 not s provlded wtth an isolating swltch andlor fuses whlch disconnect all poles. a su~table lsolat~ng swltch or fuses must be provided In the bulldlng wlrlng System (olstrlbutlon board). Furthermore. the equipment must be connected to a protectwe ground (PE) conductor. For equloment or systems wlth a flxed connecting caole but no lsolatlng switch whlch disconnects all poles. the Dower socket with the grounding pin must be installed close to the untt and must be easlly accessible. Before swltchlng on the equlpment, make sure that the voltage range senlng on the equlpment corresponds to the local power system voltage. In the case of equ~pment operatlcg on 24 V DC, make sure that prcper electrical tsola:~on 1 prov~ded s between the malns supply an0 the 24 V supply Oqly use power supply unlts to IEC 364-4-41 or HD 384.04 41 (VDE 0100 Pan 410). Fluctuattons or devlat~ons the power supply voltage from the rated value of should not exceed the tolerances speclfled In the technical specrflcatlons Otherwise. functional fallures or dangerous Cond~t~ons occur In the electronic can modu1es:equtpment. Sultable measures must be taken to make sure that programs that are ~nterrupted by a voltage drp or power supply fallure resume proper operation when s the power supply 1 restored. Care must be taken to ensure that dangerous operatlng condltlons do not occur even momentar~ly. necessary, the equlpment If must be forced Into the "emergency off" state. Emergency tr~pplng devlces In accordance wtth EN 60204'IEC 204 (VDE 01 13) must be effectwe In all operatlng modes of the automarlon equlpment Resetting the emergency off devlce must not result In any uncontrolled or undefined restan of the equipment

Caution
Install the power supply and slgna! cab!es in cuch a manner as to prevent inductlve and capacltlve ~nterference voltages from affecting the automation functions. Automation equipment and its operating elements must be installed in such a manner as to prevent unintentional operation. Automation equipment can assume an undefined state in the case of a wire break in the signal lines. To prevent this, suitable hardware and software measures must be taken when interfacing the inputs and outputs of the automation equipment.

6 Active and Passive Faults in Automation Equipment

Depending on the particular task for which the electronic automation equipment is used, both active as well as passive faults can result in a dangerous situation. For example, in drive control, an active fault is generally dangerous because it can result in an unauthorized startup of the dnve. On the other hand, a passive fault in a signalling function can result in a dangerous operating state not being reported to the operator. This differentiation of the possible faults and their classification into dangerous and non-dangerous faults, depending on the particular task. is important for all safety considerations in respect of the product supplied.

Warning
In all cases where a fault In an automat~on equ~pment can result rn severe personal injury or substantial damage to property. te. where a dangerous fault can occur, additional external measures must be taken or equipment provided to ensure or force safe operating conditions even in the event of a fault (e.g. b y means of independent l~mlt monitors, mechanical interlocks etc.).

7 Procedures for Maintenance and Repair

If measurement or testing work is to be carried out on an active unit, the rules and regulat~ons contarned in the "VBG 4.0 Accident prevent~on regulat~ovs" of the German employers liability assurance association (Berufsgenossenschaften) must be observed. Particular attention is drawn to paragraph 8 "Permissible exceptions when working on live parts". Use only suitable electrical tools.

warning
Repars to an Item of automat~on equ~pment may only be canled out by Siemens service personnel or an authorized Siemens repair center. For replacement purposes, use only parts or components that are conmned n the of spare paRS list or listed In the "Spare parts" sect~on thls manual. Unauthor~zed opening of equipment and Improper repalrs can resutt in loss of llfe or severe personal injury as well as substant~al property damage Before openlng the equipment, always remove the power plug or open the disconnecting sw~tch. Only use the fuse types specifled in the technical spec~flcat~ons the or maintenance instructions of thls manual. Do not throw batteries into an open flre and do not carry out any soldering work on batter~es (danger of explos~on). Max~mum ambient temperature 100C. Lithium batteries or batteries containing mercury should not be opened or recharged. Make sure that the same type IS used when replacing batteries. Baneries and accumulators must be d~sposed as classifled waste. of The followrng polnts requlre attent~on when uslng monitors: Improper handling, espec~ally readjustment of the h~gh the voltage O fittlng of r from another tube type can result In excesslve X-ray rad~at~on the unlt. The license to operate such a modified unlt automat~cally lapses and the unit must not be ooeraterj a al! :

The information In this manual IS checked regularly for updating and correctness and may be modifled w~thout prior notlce. The information contalned in thls manual IS protected by copyright. Photocopying and translation Into other languages IS not perm~ned without express wrmlssion from S~emens.

Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD)

1 What

i ESD? s

VSLl chips (MOS technology) are used in practically all SlMATlC S5 and TELEPERM M modules. These VLSl components are, by their nature, very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to electrostatic discharge: They are therefore defined as "Electrostatically Sensitive Devices"
" ESD" is the abbreviation used internationally.

The following warning label on the cabinets. subracks and packing indicates that electrostatically sensitive components have been used and that the modules concerned are susceptible to touch:

ESDs can be destroyed by voltage and energy levels which are far below the level perceptible to human beings. Such voltages already occur when a component or a module is touched by a person who has not been electrostat~callydischarged. Components which have been subjected to such overvoltages cannot. in most cases, be immediately detected as faulty; the fault occurs only after a long period in operation.
An electrostatic discharge - of 3500 V can be felt - of 4500 V can be heard - must take place at a minimum of 5000 V to be seen.

But just a fraction of this voltage can already damage or destroy an electronic component.

a Siemens AG C79000-08076-C339-01

ESD Gu~delines

The typical data of a component can suffer due to damage, overstressing or weakening caused by electrostatic discharge; this can result in temporary fault behavior, e.g. in the case of

temperature variations, mechanical shocks, vibrations, change of load.

Only the consequent use of protective equipment and careful observance of the precautions for handling such components can effectively prevent functional disturbances and failures of ESD modules.

When is a Static Charge Formed?

One can never be sure that the human body or the material and tools which one is using are not electrostatically charged. Small charges of 100 V are very common; these can, however, very quickly rise up to 35 000 V. Examples of static charge: - Walking on a carpet

up to 35 000 V up to 12 000 V up to 18 000 V up to 8 000 V up to 5 000 V up to up to

5 000 V 8 000 V

- Walking on a PVC flooring

Sitting on a cushioned chair Plastic desoldering unit Plastic coffee cup Plastic bags Books, etc. with a plastic binding

Important Protective Measures against Static Charge

Most plastic materials are highly susceptible to static charge and must therefore be kept as far away as possible from ESDs. Personnel who handle ESDs, the work table and the packing must all be carefully grounded.

'O Siemens AG C79WO-08076-C33941

ESD Gu~delines

Handling of ESD Modules

One basic rule to be observed is that electronic modules should be touched by hand only if this is necessary for any work to be done on them. Do not touch the component pins or the conductors. Touch components only if

- the person is grounded at all times by means of a wrist strap - the person is wearing special anti-static shoes or shoes with a
grounding strip. Before touching an electronic module, the person concerned must ensure that (s)he is not carrying any static charge. The simplest way is to touch a conductive, grounded item of equ~pment(e.g. a blank metallic cabinet part, water pipe, etc.) before touching the module. Modules should not be brought into contact with insulating materials or materials which take up a static charge, e.g. plastic foil, insulating table tops, synthetic clothing, etc. Modules should only be placed on conductive surfaces (table with anti-static table top, conductive foam material, anti-static plastic bag, .anti-static transport container). Modules should not be placed in the vicinity of monitors, TV sets (minimum distance from screen > 10 cm). The diagram on the next page shows the required protective measures against electrostatic discharge.

5 Measurements and Modification to ESD Modules

Measurements on modules may only be carried out under the following conditions: - the measuring equipment is grounded (e.g. via the PE conductor of the power supply system) or - when electrically isolated measuring equipment is used, the probe must be discharged (e.g. by touching the metallic casing of the equipment) before beginning measurements. Only grounded soldering irons may be used.

Siemens AG C79000-D8076C339-01

ESD Gu~delines

Sitting position

Standing position

a
b

c
d

e
f

Conduct~ve floorlng Anti-stat~c table Antl-stat~cshoes Anti-stat~c coat Ground~ng wrlst strap Ground~ng connect~on of the cab~nets

Standing~sitting position

Shipping of ESD Modules

Anti-static packing material must always be used for modules and components, e.g. metalized plastic boxes, metal boxes. etc. for storing and dispatch of modules and components. If the container itself is not conductive, the modules must be wrapped in a conductive material such as conductive foam, anti-static plastic bag, aluminium foil or paper. Normal plastic bags or foils should not be used under any circumstances. For modules with built-in batteries ensure that the conductive packing does not touch or short-circuit the battery connections: if necessary cover the connections with insulating tape or material.
Siemens AG C79000-08076C339-0 1

Preface

Preface
The CP 526 Manual gives an overview of the general features and operating principles of the CP 526 module. It provides a description of the hardware configuration of the CP 526 basic board, along with installation instructionsfor the CP 526 module. In addition, it guides you step-by-step through a practical application example. This book is intended for engineers, programmers, and maintenance personnel who have a general knowledge of programmable controller concepts. The following conventions are used in this volume and are listed for your reference: Convention
XxxxxXXX

Definition
Uppercase characters indicate a command, function, screen form, data handling block, or program name.

Example

SEND-DIRECT

<XXX XXXXX>

Uppercase characters within angle brackets indicate a specific key or function key on the programmer (PG) or process operation keyboard. Uppercase characters within quotation marks indicate an LED or text that you should enter exactly as shown. Pound signs indicate input fields in forms. Dollar signs indicate output fields in masks. These are inputs that were made in previous forms.

<ENTER>

"XxxxxXXX"

"COLOR"

######

$$$$$$B$

If you have any questions about CP 526 or the COM software that are not answered in this book, please contact your local Siemens representative.

Siemens A G C79000-B8576-C27-0 7 1

Preface

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Contents

Preface
1
1.1

.................................................
Introduction

0-1

......................................

1-3
1-3 1-4

Communications Processors (CPs) for Operator Control and Process Monitoring ( 0 + M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the 0 + M System with CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2

Ordering Data

....................................
.........................

2-3
2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4

CP 526lExpansion Board Ordering Data

Ordering Data for Software and Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COM GRAPH (55-DOS) with Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Function Blocks (Data Handling Blocks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software for Message Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Data for Memory Submodule

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Ordering Data for Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5

Ordering Data for Process Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Normal Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Sealed Membrane Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Ordering Data for Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MonochromeMonitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories for Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Contents

Technical Description of the CP 526 Module

Application

.........

3-5
3-5 3-6 3-10 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-19 3-24 3-27 3-36 3-36 3-42 3-45 3-55 3-57

..................................................

Mechanical Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Controller interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interprocessor Communication Flag Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Transfer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Handling Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Interprocessor Communication Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Message Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Exchange Between the Programmable Controller andtheCP526 ......................................... Emulation of the Process Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exchange of Date and Time Between the Controller and theCP526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interface t o Keyboard and Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Memory Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating and Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical and Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LogicData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Slots for the C 526 in the Programmable Controller . . . . . P Inserting and Removing the CP 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Guidelines for Keyboard, Programmer and Monitor . . Operation/lnstallation o f Noiseproof Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noiseproof Hardware Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 3-58 3-58 3-59 3-62 3-62 3-63 3-63 3-64 3-64

SiemensAG C79000-68576-C217-01

Contents

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FaultLEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X6: Enabling or Disabling Interprocessor Communication Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X7: Module Address (Page Frame Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X8: Page Window Base Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X9: Switching Between Page FramelLinear Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X10. X14: Jumper for Setting the Pixel Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X1 1 : Jumper for Setting the Firmware Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X17: Jumper for the SYNC Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanently Set Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 3.9.1 3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2 3.10.3 3.10.4 [Link] 3.1 0.4.2 [Link] 3.1 1 3.1 1.1 3.1 1.2 3.1 1.3 3.1 1.4 3.12 3.12.1 3.12.2 3.12.3 CP526Star-t-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78 . . Connecting the Process Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Submodule Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KeyboardIProgrammer Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monochrome Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ProcessVisualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99 Types o f Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99 Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99 Display of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100 Display of Process Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103 Operator-Process Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CommandLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UsingtheFunctionKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103 3-109 3-110 3-1 10

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Contents

3.13 3.13.1 3.13.2 [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link] 3.13.3 [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]

CP 526 Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the CP 526 Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Character Set for High-Resolution Monitor (Pixel Representation) Standard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special National Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cyrillic Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols That Can Be Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Character Set f o r Low-Resolution Monitor (Pixel Representation) Standard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special National Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cyrillic Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols That Can Be Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6

Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board

Application

.....

4-3
4-3 4-3 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8

..................................................

Mechanical Construction

......................................

Memory Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating and Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical and Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ModuleSlotsintheProgrammableController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting and Removing t h e CP 526 Expansion Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the CP Expansion Board t o t h e Basic Board . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4.7

Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Siemens AG C79000-68576-0 17-07

Contents

4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3

Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Submodule Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Board Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-13 4-13 4-13 4-14

Process Visualization w i t h t h e CP Expansion Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Interface t o t h e Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Updating without Displaying the Old Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Updating While Displaying the Old Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Updating Initiated by t h e Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 . . Time Checks o f t h e CP 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 . . . Displaying the Measured Values On t h e Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Updating Time and Visualization Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 BarDisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Displaying Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Pixel Graphics Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Appendix: Structure o f t h e Data Block for Curve Measured Values
. . . . . . . 4-35

Example of an Application Program for the CP 526

5.1 5.2 5.3 Set-up Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

...
.

5-3
5-3 5-4
5-8

Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters t o t h e CP 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How t o Generate 'DY N 1' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Value Input Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Value Output Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 1 7-0 1

Contents

Bar Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 Shapeoutput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53 Time Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Pixel Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 DescriptionofthePixel GraphicsDisplay'PXG1' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 Description o f the Pixel Graphics Display 'PXGZ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 .. Bar Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 5-79 Pixel Graphics Value Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86 5-86 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Value Input Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89 . Value Output Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 5-93 . Time Input Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 5-94 . . Set Bit and Reset Bit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94 Display Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-97 . . . . Message Display Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105 5.5 5.5.1 PLC Program for Application Example for the 55-135U with CPU 928 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STEP-5-Program with Handling Block Parameterization for the 55-135U with CPU 928 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1 14 5-1 18

6
6.1

System Restrictions

...............................

6-3
6-3

System Restrictions C 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P

6.2

System Restrictions Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Appendix A Appendix B

C 526 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P

A-3

Reference Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. 0-1 .. . .

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Contents

Figures
Default Jumper Settings of the CP 526 Color Module Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 . . Default Jumper Settings of the CP 526 Monochrome Module Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Front Panel o f the C 526 Color Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 P Front Panel o f the C 526 Monochrome Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 P Schematic Representation of the Data Exchange Process . . . . . . . 3-11 The Different Parts o f the Dual Port RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Structure Diagram for Transmitting Messages from the Controller t o the C 526 Using SEND-DIRECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 P Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Messagescreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Structure o f the Data Block (MELD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Structure of the Data Block (QUIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Structure of the Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 . . Flowchart "Processing a Key Code Job" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . Structure of the Data Transfer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Cabinet Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66 . Cable Connections t o Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 Serial Interface, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86 . .. . Serial Interface, Passive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87 Monitor Register Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92 Horizontal Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97 . . Vertical T ~ m ~ n.g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98 . Standard Format of the Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100 Key Layout for the Large Process Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 04 Key Codes for the Large Process Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 05 Cyri ll ic Process Keyboard (Section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 06 Key Assignments for Cyrillic Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107 Key Layout for the Small Process Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 08 4- 2 4-3 4-4 4- 5 4-6 EPROMassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Frontpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Assembly Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Standard Organization o f the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Displaying the Measured Values on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Contents

Tables
Module Slots in the Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 Fault LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71 Backplane Connector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81 . . Backplane Connector 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82 Memory Submodule Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83 Seriallnterface ....................................... . 3-85 . Overview of Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93 Monitor Register Standard Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94 CP 526 Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101 C 526 Input Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3-1 15 Standard Character Set of the C 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 17 P Special National Characters of the C 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 18 P Module Slots of the Expansion Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Memory Submodule Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Expansion Board Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Example o f Defining Curve Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Number o f Elongated Scaling Marks (labeled) for Various Window Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizes of Coordinate Systems in Characters and Pixels for Various Window Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Span (distance between greatest and smallest scale integer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number o f Elongated Scaling Marks (labeled) for Various Bar Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTE

5-70 5-70 5-82 5-82

These instructions do not cover all details or variations in equipment or provide for every circumstance that can arise in connection with installation. operation. or maintenance. If you want further information or if particular problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for your purposes. contact your local Siemens sales office. The contents of this instruction manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement. commitment. or relationship The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.

0-10

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-0 1

Contents
Communications Processor CP 526 Contents C79000-B857642217

Introduction
Ordering Data Technical Description of the CP 526 Module Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board Example of an Application Program for the CP 526

System Restrictions

Appendix
A CP 526 Error Messages C79000-B8576-C217-01 B Reference Literature

10

Chapter 1

Contents

1
1.1

Introduction

......................................
...............

1-3
1-3
1-4 1-5

Communications Processors (CPs) for Operator Control and Process Monitoring (0 + M) Configuration of the 0 + M System with C P Available 0 + M Communications Processors

1.2 1.3

.....................

....................

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 7 7-01

Contents

Chapter 1

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-01

Chapter 1

CommunicationsProcessors

1
1.l

Introduction
Communications Processors (CPs) for Operator Control and Process Monitoring ( 0 + M)

Even at the level of the programmable controller, i.e. in a machine-oriented environment, automation tasks of today often require that the control and visual display of the process not only be simple but also be user-friendly and efficient. The communications processor (CP) is used for operator control and process + monitoring (0 M) when the text display unit cannot meet the requirements and the complex operator terminal is not yet necessary. Communication with the process is implemented with a module which is especially designed for this task and which can be plugged into the programmable controller (PLC). Graphics and texts are stored in the module's own user memory. The module only communicates with the central processor of the programmable controller when data for variable segments is t o be exchanged. The C i s simply plugged into one of the slots of the SIMATIC S5 programmable P controller provided for this purpose. You can thus "upgrade" your system in an easy way and at low cost. Using a CP, your personnel can communicate directly with the process, specify setpoints, verify actual values, evaluate error messages, print out reports and make the process "transparent" by means of plant mimics.

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-Q 17-01

Configuration of the 0 i System M

Chapter 1

1.2

Configuration of the 0 + M System with Communications Processor (CP)

This machine-oriented, or direct, operator control and process monitoring system consists of the communications processor itself, a monochrome or color monitor and a process keyboard for input to the process. The CP 526 and CP 527 can be which enables extended by an additional module, -the CP expansion board -, process data to be represented in the form of curves and the user memory t o be expanded. These functions are already fully integrated in the CP 528 standard module. Plant displays, measuring scales, tables, curves, message texts, reports etc. are configured using a SIMATIC S5 programmer. The COM configuration software enables the user to develop programs simply and efficiently. He need not be familiar with a programming language.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-0 1

Chapter 1

Available 0 + M Communications Processors

1.3

Available 0 + M Communications Processors

The "Operator control and process monitoring with communications processors" system comprises modules which differ in complexity and speed to enable the user t o configure a system according t o his requirements:

CP 526 module for monochrome monitor

display of error messages; configuration of static images; without printer connection; forced ventilation required (module with heat exchanger can also be used without fan)

CP 526 module for color monitor

can be used with CP expansion board; display of error messages; configuration of static images; without printer connection; forced ventilation required (module with heat exchanger can also be used without fan)
a

CP 527 module for monochrome monitor

can be used with CP expansion board (only for memory extension); with printer connection; quick display construction and updating; extended scope of functions (e.g. user-configurable reports, inputloutput fields); extended quantity standard (increased number of segments, functions and messages); extended user memory; additional functions for PLC communications;

Siemens AG C79000-68576-U 17-01

Available 0 + M Communications Processors

Chapter 1

password-protectedfunction commands; pixel-graphics hard copy; combinable process windows; forced ventilation not required; i f operated with expansion board, however, forced ventilation required; BED1 operator control and diagnostic system

CP 527 module for color monitor

can be used with CP expansion board; with printer connection; quick display construction and updating; extended scope of functions (e.g. user-configurablereports, input/output fields, extended signalling system); extended quantity standard; (increased number of segments, functions and messages); extended user memory; additional functions for PLC communications; password-protectedfunction commands; pixel-graphics hard copy; combinable process mi miCS; forced ventilation not required; if operated with expansion board, however, forced ventilation required; BED1 operator control and diagnostic system

CP 5261527 interface module (expansion board)

for the representation of curves; enlarged texts (up t o factor 16); enlarged value output fields (up t o factor 16); additional user memory; forced ventilation required

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Chapter 1

Available 0 + M CommunicationsProcessors

CP 528 analog output module for RGB color monitor

extension of the functions of the CP 527 basic and expansion board, offered on a single-width module; 2 serial interfaces: - TTY (20 mA) for programmer (9600 baud), printer and keyboard (2400 baud); - TTY (20 mA) 1V.24 for printer (max. of 9600 baud); further improved display refresh and actualization rate; extended user memory; forced ventilation not required; BED1 operator control and diagnostic system

CP 528 digital output module for ELD monitor

extension of the functions of the CP 527 basic and expansion board, offered on a single-width module; 2 serial interfaces: - TTY (20 mA) for programmer (9600 baud), printer and keyboard (2400 baud); - TTY (20 mA) 1V.24 for printer (max. of 9600 baud); further improved display refresh and actualization rate; extended user memory; forced ventilation not required; B EDl operator control and diagnostic system

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Available 0 + M CommunicationsProcessors

Chapter l

This volume gives an overview of the general features and operating principles of the CP 526 module and i t s use with the expansion board.

Introduction Ordering Data Technical Description of the CP 526 Module Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board Application Example for the CP 526 System Restrictions Error Messages Reference Literature The CP 526 is configured using the configuration software COM GRAPH.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-0 1

Contents
Communications Processor Contents

Introduction

Ordering Data
Technical Description of the CP 526 Module Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board Example of an Application Program for the CP 526
-

System Restrictions

C79000-B8576-C217-01

Appendix A CP 526 Error Messages B Reference Literature

Chapter 2

Contents

Ordering Data

....................................
.........................

2-3
2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-5

CP 526/Expansion Board Ordering Data

Ordering Data for Software and Manuals ....................... COM GRAPH (55-DOS) with Manual ............................. Standard Function Blocks (Data Handling Blocks) ................ Software for Message Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Data for Memory Submodule Ordering Data for Connecting Cables

.........................

...........................

Ordering Data for Process Keyboard ............................ 2-6 . .. . . Normal Keyboards ...................... . . .. . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Sealed Membrane Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Ordering Data for Monitors ..................................... Color Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MonochromeMonitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories for Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Contents

Chapter 2

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C2 17-01

Chapter 2

Ordering Data for Software and Manuals

Ordering Data

The order numbers for the following components as well as the length key for ordering connecting cables are given in the ST 80 Catalog.

2.1

CP 526 / Expansion BoardIOrdering Data

CP 526 Module

Color Monochrome

forced ventilation natural ventilation forced ventilation natural ventilation

CP Expansion Board

2.2
2.2.1

Ordering Data for Software and Manuals

COM GRAPH with Manual

for PG 635-11/685/695/710-11/730/750/770 (SS-DOS; 3 112" and 5 114 " diskettes) in German, English, French

2.2.2

Standard Function Blocks (Data Handling Blocks)

(for order numbers refer to the ST 57 Catalog)

AG 135U S-Processor (SS-DOS; 3 112" and 5 114" diskettes) German, English, FrenchVersion

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Ordering Data for Software and Manuals

Chapter 2

AG 135U R-ProcessorlCPU 928 (SS-DOS; 3 112" and 5 114" diskettes) German, English, French Version AG 150U (SS-DOS; 3 112" and 5 114" diskettes) German, English, French Version AG 155U (SS-DOS; 3 112" and 5 114" diskettes) German, English, French Version

223 ..

Software for Message Functions

T (for order numbers refer t o the S 57 Catalog) Message functions for up t o 4 Standard CPs for 55-1 15U 135U (CPU 9221928) 1SOU 155U (SS-DOS; 3 112" and 5 114" diskettes) memory requirements approx. 9 kbytes i n the PLC

Compact Message Functions for a Standard CP for 55-1 15U 135U (CPU 9221928) O 1S U 155U (CPU 9461947) (SS-DOS; 3 112" and 5 114" diskettes) German, English, French Version memory requirements approx. up t o 4.5 kbytes in the PLC

SiemensAG 09000-138576-Q 17-01

Chapter 2

Ordering Data for Memory Submodule

COM PMC System software (SS-DOS; 3 112" and 5 114" diskettes) German, English, French Version
COM PMC is only required for code Message Functions for up t o four

standard CPs

23 .
EPROM

Ordering Data for Memory Submodule

32 kbytes 64 kbytes 128 kbytes 32 kbytes 64 kbytes 128 kbytes

RAM

Battery-backed RAM 128 kbytes Backup Battery

2.4

Ordering Data for Connecting Cables

Connecting cable between programmer and C 526 P MP keyboard and C 526 P process keyboard and CP 526

Connecting cable (coaxial cable with double shielding) between P monitor (BNC connection) and C 526 monitor (DIN connection) and C 526 P

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Ordering Data for Process Keyboard

Chapter 2

2.5
2.5.1

Ordering Data for Process Keyboard

Normal Keyboards

Process keyboard 40: AI phanumeric keyboard, grade of protection IP 20, desktop model

2.5.2

Sealed Membrane Keyboard

Process keyboard 20: AI phanumeric keyboard, grade of protection IP 54 Key assignment international cyrillic Process keyboard 10: Function keyboard, grade of protection IP 54 desk-top model built-in model

2.6
2.6.1

Ordering Data for Monitors

Color Monitors

Desk-top model, office type, 36 cm and 51 cm screen diagonal Desk-top model, industrial type, 36 cm and 51 cm screen diagonal Built-in model, industrial type, 36 cm and 51 cm screen diagonal

2.6.2

Monochrome Monitors

Desk-top model, industrial type, 31 cm screen diagonal

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 2

Ordering Data for Monitors

2.6.3

Monitor Control Panels

Color version MP 20,25 cm screen diagonal MP 40,36 cm screen diagonal MP 14B-527,36 cm screen diagonal Monochrome version MP 20,23 cm screen diagonal MP 30, electroluminescence display with an active display of 192 X 144 mm MP 12A-527,3 1 cm screen diagonal

2.7.4

Accessories for Monitors

Grounding bar with 4 cable clamps for 4 coaxial cables with double shielding for 51 cm process monitors for 36 cm process monitors Cable clamp for attaching the coaxial cable with double shielding on the above grounding bar Cable clamp for attaching the coaxial cable with double shielding t o the monochrome monitor Passive cable adaptor for monitors up to 15.6 kHz line frequency required for cable length (CP 526 - monitor) > 80 m and < 350 m (for coaxial cables with two shields) Active cable adaptor for monitors up to 30.84 kHz line frequency required for cable length (CP 526 - monitor) > 80 m and < 200 m (for coaxial cables with two shields)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-017-01

Contents
Communications Processor CP 526 Contents

Introduction

Ordering Data

Technical Description of the CP 526 Module

Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board Example of an Application Program for the CP 526 System Restrictions

Appendix
A CP 526 Error Messages
C79000-B8576-C217.01

B Reference Literature

10

Chapter 3

Contents

3
3.1

Technical Description of the CP 526 Module

Application

.........

3-5
3-5 3-6

..................................................

Mechanical Construction

......................................

Programmable Controller Interface ............................ Interprocessor Communication Flag Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Transfer Area ........................................... Data Handling Blocks ......................................... SystemDataArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Interprocessor Communication Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MessageTexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messagestructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Exchange Between the Programmable Controller andtheCP526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emulation o f the Process Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exchange o f Date and Time Between t h e Controller and the CP 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface t o Keyboard and Programmer Memory Submodules

........................

3-57 3-57 3-58 3-58 3-58 3-59 3-62 3-62 3-63 3-63 3-64 3-64

........................................

Technical Specifications ...................................... Operating and Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical and Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LogicData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Guidelines ....................................... Module Slots for the CP 526 i n the Programmable Controller . . . . . Inserting and Removing the CP 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Guidelines for Keyboard, Programmer and Monitor . . Operation/lnstal lation o f Noiseproof Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noiseproof Hardware Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Contents

Chapter 3

Operation ................................................... Operator Controls and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpersettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X6: Enabling or Disabling Interprocessor Communication Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X7: Module Address (Page Frame Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X8: Page Window Base Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X9: Switching Between Page FrameILinear Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X10, X14: Jumper for Setting the Pixel Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X1 1: Jumper for Setting the Firmware Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X17: Jumper for the SYNC Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanently Set Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 3.9.1 3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2 3.10.3 3.10.4 [Link] [Link] [Link] 3.1 1 3.1 1.1 3.1 1.2 3.1 1-3 3.1 1-4 3.12 3.12.1 3.12.2 3.12.3

CP 526 Start-up .............................................. 3-78 Connecting the Process Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80 Connector Pin Assignments ................................... 3-80 Backplane Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80 Memory Submodule Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-83 . KeyboardIProgrammer Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84 Video Output Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88 Color Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88 Monochrome Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89 Monitor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89 Process Visualization ......................................... 3-99 Types o f Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99 Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99 Display of Process Data ..................................... 3-100 Display of Process Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 103 Operator-Process Communication ........................... CommandLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UsingtheFunctionKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-103 3-109 3-110 3-1 10

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Chapter 3

Contents

3.1 3 3.13.1 3.13.2 [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link] 3.13.3 [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]

8526 Character Set

.......................................

Overview of the CP 526 Character Set ........................ Character Set for High-Resolution Monitor (Pixel Representation) Standard Characters ........................................ Special National Characters ................................. Cyrillic Characters .......................................... Symbols That Can Be Loaded ................................ Character Set for Low-Resolution Monitor (Pixel Representation) Standard Characters ................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special National Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cyrillic Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols That Can Be Loaded ................................

SiememAG C79000-88576-C21 7-01

Contents

Chapter 3

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Chapter 3

Application

Technical Description of the CP 526 Module

3.1

Application

The C 526 communications processor (CP) can be installed in the 55-11SU, 55P 135U, 55-150U, and 55-155U programmable controllers. The C 526 provides the P video terminal interface for operator-processcommunication and visualization. The C 526 contains the complete electronics t o support a video display unit. All P you have t o connect is a color or monochrome monitor and a process keyboard. With the keyboard, you can call up stored process displays and assign new setpoints. The power of the CP 526 module is greatly enhanced when i t is used with the expansion board. The expansion board allows you t o generate the following types of graphic displays of process data: curves, as a function of time bars, with color change t o denote limit violations display of digital measured values, in magnified form

SiemensAG C79000-88576-U 7-01 7

Mechanical Construction

Chapter 3

3.2

Mechanical Construction

The CP 526 module is a printed circuit board in double-height Eurocard format, which makes it compatible with the 902 modular packaging system. The front panel has the width of a standard module slot (approximately 20 mm).
All CP 526 modules have each of the following connectors:
a

Two 48-pin, range 2 backplane connectors One 15-contact, female connector for attaching a programmer (PG) or a process keyboard and a printer Color version: four coaxial sockets for connecting the monitor; Monochrome version: one coaxial socket for connecting the monitor One 60-pin male connector for attaching an expansion board

Figures 3-1 and 3-2 show the major components as well as the plug-in jumpers. The jumper settings made in the factory are highlighted. Figures 3-3 and 3-4 show the rectangular receptacle on the front panel for a special EPROM (erasable programmable read-only memory) or RAM (randomaccess memory) submodule for application programs. Additional front panel equipment includesa switch, three LEDs (see subsection 3.8.3)) and the interfaces mentioned above for connecting the monitors.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

'

Mechanical Construction

Chapter 3

-.
L

Ii __I._

_
- - -7
Submodule Connector
'

Backplane Connector 1
7 -

I I l ; I 1 1
I 1. ! I 1 I 1 l L--rI

! I

7- 3
I

'L--1

! 1, l
1
I

l
l
I ! l

i i
3

'4

'

I i l I
L-

i
\ \

X6 i

~--d
~ IT-L P -

I 1j

fl 1I

l ?
l

r------F

il
l

----

----

,-.l

-.,-,

I-i-.l-,
I

L L L J L L J

.
Double jumper inserted

1 I
L

0 Double jumper
1

removed

Triple jumper: 1 removed. 2 and 3 inserted

Figure 3-2: Default Jumper Settings of the CP 526 Monochrome Module Printed Circuit Board

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-07

Chapter 3

Mechanical Construction

P : : :

0RUN 0STOP
O
KULT

1
0 cp
FAULT

0RUN 0STOP

Figure 3-3: Front Panel of the CP 526 Color Module

Figure 3-4: Front Panel of the C 526 P Monochrome Module

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-0 1

Programmable Controller lnterface

Chapter 3

3.3

Programmable Controller Interface

Since t h e user programs that contain t h e information for graphics displays, message texts, etc. are stored i n a memory su bmodule i n the CP 526, only variable data, such as process data, i s exchanged between the CPU of t h e programmable controllerl) and the CP 526. Data is exchanged through a dual-port RAM, a RAM area o f t h e CP 526. The page o f the dual-port RAM is like a mailbox. The CP 526 and the controller can exchange messages, data, requests, etc. through this "mail box." The controller always takes the initiative i n data exchange. The CPU always "asks" t h e CP 526 whether or n o t i t has data t o transfer. To avoid data exchange problems between t h e controller and the CP 526, the controller program calls a function block, or data handling block, which polls t h e CP 526 every controller cycle. The actual data exchange is executed automatically by the "data handling block." Figures 3-5 and 3-6 show a schematic representation o f the data exchange process.

1)

In this manual t h e terms 'programmable controller' and 'CPU' (central processor o f t h e programmable controller) are often used synonymously.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-07

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

Programmable Controller

CP 526

i c
i

Data Handling Blocks

DualPort RAM

4 + +

Video Terminal Controller

-k

Process Keyboard

+
Printer

Figure 3-5: Schematic Representation of the Data Exchange Process

The dual-port RAM is divided into three parts:

F200 Interprocessor Flags

l
Communication

(2048)

Page Interface for data handling blocks and system data

FEFF

d
Vector Address

Vector Register

Figure 3-6: The Different Parts of the Dual Port RAM

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 7-0 1 1

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

3.3.1

Interprocessor Communication Flag Area

The interprocessor communication flag area consists of 256 interprocessor communication flag bytes, or 2048 interprocessor communication flags. The controller can cause displays t o be output t o the monitor by means of these flags. The interprocessor communication flags are exchanged between the controller and the C 526 once in each processing cycle of the STEP 5 program. P P If several C s andlor a coordination processor are used in a programmable controller, the interprocessor communication flags must be divided up among the varions CPs (by setting jumpers). This i s also true if several central processing units (CPUs) are used in the 55-135U or 55-155U. Note that the total number of all enabled interprocessor communication flags must not exceed 2048 ( = 256 bytes).

3.3.2

Data Transfer Area

The data transfer area, or page, is an area within the dual-port RAM in which data is exchanged between the CP 526 and the controller. The data, for example, might be in the form of numerical values t o be incorporated in a mimic of a process displayed on the video screen. Unlike the interprocessor communication flag area, the page area can be "multiplied". Every communications processor installed in the controller, including each C 526, P has i t s own data transfer area, or page. Each page has its own page number, which is called the vector address. Forthe controller, all these pages lie in the same address area in the CP's memory. The vector address is the additional information, which, together with the memory address of the page, enables information t o be sent t o a particular page (i.e., t o a particular CP). The vector registers all have the same memory address on all the CPs. By writing data (eight bits) into the vector address (using the standard data handling block), all CPs can read the new vector address. Only the C that has been coded (via i t s P jumper settings) t o that vector address wi I I be enabled t o receive the page of data. All the other CPs will be inhibited from receiving data.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-0 1

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

The controller may now exchange data with the page of the enabled CP. All other CPs and interfaces are completely unaffected by this. Only by writing a new value into the vector address can another C be selected for data exchange. P

3.3.3

Data Handling Blocks

For the controller and the C 526 t o communicate with each other, the P SY NCHRON data handling block must be correctly executed. To execute SYNCHRON, you must specify the parameter S N by setting the SR appropriate jumpers in jumper header X7. Processing of the SYNCHRON data handling block is indicated by the "START" display on the screen. The organization blocks (OBs) for COLD RESTART (OB20) and WARM RESTART (OB2110B22)must be programmed in the controller program, and these OBs must call the SYNCHRON data handling block. In the case of the WARM RESTART OBs, you can also program "PLC STOP". The SEND-ALL data handling block transmits data from the controller t o the CP 526. The RECEIVE-ALLdata handling block transmits data from the CP 526 t o the controller. SEND-ALLand RECEIVE-ALL must be called at least every 100 ms in the STEP 5 program (max. 2 s permitted). The shorter the time between the calls, the better you can maintain the updating rates programmed into the dynamic displays (see Planning Guide COM GRAPH, Chapter 4, Appendix 1). The data blocks with values for the inputloutput fields are also established during programming. You must define them in the controller program, and assign appropriate values t o them. To speed up data transfer between the controller s and the CP 526, all dynamic values, or a many as possible, should be stored in one data block. During data transfer with the controller, the CP 526 does not permit blocking, since the maximum frame size prescribed by the C 526 always corresponds t o the P size of a standard data block (256 words). The maximum frame size " BLG R," which is sent by the data handling blocks t o the C during synchronization, must P also be set at 512 bytes (see also Description of the Data Handling Blocks).

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

In the case of the SS-135U programmable controller with S processor, you do not need to specify the frame size. There are two ways t o initiate commands on the CP 526 through a controller program : By programming the SEND-DIRECTdata handling block or
Bysettingaparticularinterprocessorcommunicationflagbit

When programming the SEND-DIRECT data handling block, you only need t o know the job number. This is the number entered in the A-NR field in the COM PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS form. The QTYP, DBNR, QANF, and QLAE parameters are not relevant. A command ( = job) with a particular job number can be reset by programming RESET-DIRECTdata handling block with the same job number. In other words, the RESET-DIRECT data handling block deletes any display that was initiated by a SEND-DIRECT with the same job number. The RESET-ALLdata handling block (job number = 0) resets all commands currently being processed on the CP 526. The status of SEND-DIRECT or RECEIVE-DIRECTjobs is in the job status word. To find out which job is presently being processed by the CP, use the CONTROL data handling block. For this purpose, the job number is passed to the CONTROL data handling block as a parameter.
Bits 0 t o 3 of the job status word contain the actual status of the job (command or special job).

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

Bit 3 2 1 0 0000 0010 0100 1000 1010 Status after synchronization and RESET-ALL Job executing Job completed without error Job completed w i t h an error CP 526 not ready for this job

I f bit 0 is set, a RECEIVE-DIRECT is possible for t h e job. In the case of status = 8 (bit 3 = l ) , the high-order byte (bits 8 - 15) i n the job status word contains one o f the following error identifiers:

Identifier

Meaninq Controller error

0608H 0708H

Job n o t possible now; try again later Error because of continuously unacceptable firmware status; subsequent attempts are n o t recommended Interpreter error (error i n the execution o f a command, or entryloperator error) Error connected w i t h message acquisition (SEND-DIRECT 219); message buffer overflow. Error w i t h SEND-DIRECT 218 (send time t o the CP 526); job not possible now; try again later Error with RECEIVE-DIRECT 21 8 (receive time from CP 526); job n o t possible now; try again later

0808H

0908H

OA08H

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

Any errors flagged in the status word must be interrogated in the STEP 5 application program. If the status indicates that a job is still executing (status = 2), you cannot process a second job with this job number. Only after the job is completed (status = 4) can you start another job with the same job number. If a command that is t o be initiated through a SEND-DIRECTjob is not stored in the memory submodule of the CP 526, the job i s identified with 080Ah (h = hexadecimal). This job is not processed until the next SYNCHRON data handling block i s executed. You can terminate a command with a new command, a RESET-DIRECT, or a RESET-ALL. If errors occur in the C 526 while a command i s being processed, the error P identifier and the status are set t o 8 (job status word = 0808h) upon completion of the command. In addition, the exact error number isstored at address F666h in the system data area (for a description of error numbers, see subsection 3.3.4). If a command is correctly executed, the status i s changed from 2 to 4 (bit 2 = 1) upon completion of the command. If you specify job number 0 in the CONTROL data handling block, the job status word contains the job number of the command being processed by the CP 526 (but only i f this command was assigned a job number when programming). In addition t o the CONTROL data handling block checking the job status word, each data handling block must be checked for parameter assignment errors (monitoring of PAFE byte; see Operator Guide for the data handling blocks of the programmable controller you are using).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

Special Jobs SEND-DIRECT for messages: Job number can be programmed w i t h COM (default: 219), Identifier 33H i n byte 0 of t h e transferred data block SEND-DIRECT for key code: Same job number as SEND-DIRECT for messages, identifier 64H i n byte 0 o f the transferred data block SEND-DIRECT and RECEIVE-DIRECT for system time: Job number = 218 I f the SEND-DIRECT 218 or the RECEIVE-DIRECT 218 are t o execute i n every cycle of the STEP 5 application program, they must be programmed after all the other calls o f handling blocks i n the cyclic STEP 5 application program. Otherwise, t h e controller-to-CP 526 interface is restricted i n its functional capacity due t o overload. Figure 3-7 shows the correct processing sequence of a SEND-DIRECT handling block i n the form o f a structure diagram.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

FOREVER (cyclic controller program)

IF ' first attempt to transmit these messages'

still executing

complete SENDDIRECT for messages (Interrogate PAFE byte) First attempt to transmit this message has been completed

complete executing without error

c o m p l e t e c o m p l e t e cannot b e SENDwith a n with a n p r o c e s s e d DIRECT error error correctly

Condition Repeat (message 'messages j o b buffer for CP 526' overflow) reset SENDDIRECT for messages (Interrogate PAFE byte)

C-

Figure 3-7: Structure Diagram for Transmitting Messages from t h e Controller t o the CP 526 Using SEND-DIRECT

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

When using the interprocessor communication flag t o initiate a command, be sure t o define the output interprocessor communication flags in data block DB1 of the controller. To detect a signal edge from 0 t o 1 to be recognized, the interprocessor communication flag must remain a t 0 for at least one second and then remain at 1 for at least one second (see subsection 3.3.5). You must also program the interprocessor communication flag command in the appropriate screen of the COM using the name "MXXX-X". The variables in the name are explained as follows:

B i t number (0 - 7) of the interprocessor communication flag byte

+ Interprocessor communication flag

byte number (0 - 255)

3.3.4

System Data Area

In addition to the data transfer area for the data handling blocks, there is also a memory area in the dual port RAM of the CP 526 containing information about internal system data. Currently, the controller can read this data only through the STEP 5 system operations. Although a write access by the controller is physically possible, i t is not recommended.
SYSTAT

The data in this area identifies the operating and error statuses of the interface module. The data fields are rigidly structured and have the same meaning in all communications processors.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 7-01 7

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

The system area SYSTAT of the CP 526 lies within the dual-port RAM beginning at byte address F660h. This area i s described as follows:

Bf i e Address

F660

Bit 0 = 1 Bit 1 = 1
F66 1

Operating Status The CP is in the STOP state. The CP is in the RUN state. Battery Check The CP has n o battery backup o f i t s own. Reader byte The C 526 increments this byte every P 100 msec. during trou ble-free operation.
PG Priority The CP 526 cannot relinquish control t o

Bits 0 and 1=0 Bits 0 7

F662

F663

Bit 0 = 0

the programmer (PG)

F664 F665 F666

Unassigned Unassigned Bits 0 - 7 Error Message The CP 526 writes the last message number that was displayed i n the right side o f the command line (can be set t o 0 after evaluation by the controller).

F667

U nassigned

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-0 1

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

The SYSID data area begins at byte address F680h and contains a parameter set for the following: Describing the characteristics of the C 526 in the system P Providing information concerning the hardware module Providing information concerning the firmware and software version o f the module Fundamental Iy: The parameters are stored in ASCII code and can therefore be read in plaintext by the controller. Each parameter field has a maximum length and i s terminated by a carriage return (i.e., the < RETURN > key). The parameter field can contain less than the maximum number of characters; in this case, CR follows immediately after the last character. An unused field contains no characters, and i s identified only by a CR. The last parameter is terminated by the SYSID end identifier CR ETX. The parameters are passed partly from the C 526 and partly from the COM. P I t can therefore happen that the parameters t o be passed by COM are still missing a t the time of the Read operation.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-07

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

The SYSID data area i s described as follows: Field Definition Submodule identifier EPROM: order number 6ES5 xxx-xxxxx RAM: capacity in kwords
CP 526 displays RAM capacity of basic board

Max. Length
12

Example

373-OM41 RAM 16 KW

Module identifier
CP fi rmware version

(if expansion board plugged in) Plant designation Origination date Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Version of COM software version Version of PROM software version Programmingdate for EPROM user submodules Number of EPROM submodules belonging to program
1

Blast Furnace 47

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

Field 13

Definition Type of CP 526 module (color, monochrome) Type of monitor resolution (highllow) Unassigned End identifier

Max. Length

Example

14

15

CR, ETX

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

3.3.5

Handling lnterprocessor Communication Flag

The interprocessor communication flags, that are defined as input flags (CE) in data block DB1 of the controller cannot be processed as output interprocessor communication flags (CA). As a result, interprocessor communication flag bits that are set by the BIT S T command from the keyboard can only be reset by the E BIT RESET command.
If you initiate a reset from the controller side without a CP 526 command, you can overwrite the interprocessor communication flags with the STEP 5 system operations.

The addresses of the interprocessor communication flag bytes on the CP 526, and the corresponding relative addresses in the controller, are as follows: Relative address (decimal) in the controller Absolute address (hexadecimal) in the CP

Below are examples of a program in which the interprocessor communication flags are set the by the controller. The following conditions apply:
8

The interprocessor communication flags that are being used are enabled on the CP 526 and are programmed as interprocessor communication input flags (CE) in data block DB 1 of the controller. An interprocessor communication flag byte is evaluated only in a controller.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-U 7 7-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

Example 1 Bits 0 t o 7 of the interprocessor communication flag byte 32 are programmed on the CP 526 by the BIT S T command. E
D01: KH: ..., CEOO, 0020, ...

FBX

L FY32 L KB 255 AW JZ = END L KBO L KHF220

TIR 3

Interprocessor communication flag byte 32 in accumulator 2 Bit pattern OOFF in accumulator 1 FY32 = O? Jump i f FY32 = 0 Accumulator2 = 0 Address of interprocessor communication flag byte 32 in the CP Interprocessor communication flag byte 32 in the CP overwritten with 0 Evaluate flag The flags are reset by the operating system before the next cycle.

A F 32.0 END:

This example refers t o the 55-135U and 55-1SOU programmable controllers; in the case of the 55-115U, replace the TIR 3 operation by the TlR 2 operation.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 7 7-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

Example 2

Bit 2 o f interprocessor communication flag byte 34 is programmed on the CP 526 by the command BIT SET.
DB 1: KH: ..., CEOO, 0022, ... FBX AN F 34.2 JC = END
R F 34.2 L FY34 L KHF222 TIR 3

Interrogate F 34.2 = 0 ? Jump i f F 34.2 = 0 : (evaluate F 34.2) Reset F 34.2 Load FY34 into accumulator 2 Address KM34 in CP Overwrite KM34 in CP w i t h FY34

END:

This example refers t o the 55-1 35U and 55-1 SOU programmable controllers; i n the case of the 55-1 1SU, replace the TIR 3 operation by the TlR 2 operation.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

3.3.6

Message Processing

Message processing has the following features: Texts for a maximum of 1000 messages Four message groups distinguished Message buffer in the CP for 100 messages Indication of message buffer overflow Display of the message status through attribute change within the associated message text The following four possible conditions apply t o messages:
- Condition 1 +

Message has come (fault) and has not been acknowledged. - Condition 2 + Message has come, and has subsequently gone (back t o normal), but has not yet been acknowledged. Message has come and has been acknowledged. - Condition 3 + Message has come, has been acknowledged, and has - Condition 4 + gone. Output of current error messages in the message line of the monitor.

Message Processing in the Programmable Controller The software package "Signaling functions for standard CP" (also refer t o the 'Ordering Data' section) evaluates faultsJchanges arriving from the process in the controller C and activates message output. It comprises all necessary standard PU function blocks and data blocks. The use of this package in plants with only a small number of messages to be displayed i s less advisable, since i t requires a considerable amount of memory capacity and computing time. In this case, messagesshould be started from the PLC. To do this, enter the message number in a data block generated for this purpose and transfer the latter t o the CP 526 using the SEND DIRECT data handling block. The controller determines the status of the message, and writes the message number and status such as 'message come', 'message gone', or 'acknowledgedB in the message data [Link] date and time are fetched from the hardware clock of the CP 526 by means of the RECEIVE DIRECTdata handling block with job number 218 (also refer t o subsection 3.3.8) and are written by the PLC into the message data block, data words 3 t o 6 (see Fig. 3-10). Transmission i s then

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

initiated by a SEND DIRECT from the PLC (see Fig. 3-8). However, i f you enter the value '0' for 'Day' (10th byte in 'MELD' data block), this is interpreted by the C P 526 as a request t o fetch the date and time directly from i t s own hardware clock and add them t o the message. Message acknowledgment is initiated from the C 526, the corresponding P message number is written into the acknowledgment data block, and the controller updates the data block with a RECEIVE-ALL.

Message Processing i n the CP 526 The CP 526 receives the message data block from the controller and enters the P arriving message/acknowledgment numbers one after the other into the C internal message buffer, together with the date and time, provided there i s an associated message text in the user memory. If messages have already been received, the date and time are updated. The last message arriving in the data block is displayed in the message line. You can specify i f only arriving messages (i.e. the last message t o come) or those that have come and gone (i. e. the last message that has come or gone) t o be displayed as current message i n the message line. You have t o make this decision i n the C P PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT form.
If the buffer is full, the last message entered i n the buffer i s overwritten (overflow message). If more messages occur, they overwrite the previous overflow message. The number o f overflow messages is determined in the C 526, and displayed P (flashing) in the message Iine beginning at column 72. There is no further reference i n the second part o f the command Iine. The overflow is retained in the message status of the message buffer, and the condition code word 0908h is set i n the job status word of the SEND-DIRECT (see subsection 3.3.3).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C21 7-0 1

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

To remove messages from the message buffer, the messages must be brought into the "back-to-normal" or "gone" state. The messages must then be acknowledged. This deletes them from the message buffer. New messages can then be entered i n the message buffer. If the message number already exists i n the message buffer, the following conditions are distinguished:

State o f message arriving arriving arriving arriving

State of message i n CP 526 buffer has come has come and gone has come and has been acknowledged has come has come and gone has come and has been acknowledged has come has come and gone has come and has been acknowledged

1 New state of message

i i n buffer
arriving + time upd. arriving + time upd. arriving + time upd.

Display type

going going going

has come and gone has come and gone has come, has been acknowl., has gone has come and has been acknowledged message is cancel led has come and has been acknowledged

acknowledgm. acknowledgm. acknowledgm.

(Time upd.: Date and time are updated in message buffer)

If a message number is n o t i n the message buffer, any back-to-normal messages or acknowledgments for the message are rejected.

Resetting the Message Buffer

In the event o f a cold restart after a PLC-SYNCHRON, and after display editing P w i t h the COM, message processing in t h e C 526, including the message buffer, is reset.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27-0 1 1

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

Programmable controller

User memory Max. 1000 message texts generated by COM GRAPH Display of messages generated by COM GRAPH Appl~cat~on programs a) Displa of t h e process image 26 hes180 columns Message line, process display Position can be selected (line 1) Positlon can be selected (line 23)

Messa es coming from t e process

9,

Buffer for messages

H

For maximum 100 messages

Last message Acknowledgment controlled by the controller

Command line Function keys <F1 > t o < F8 > Function keys <F9> t o <F16> b) Displayed message images

or:

Message line Header line Display of the message text. The associated B message text number is located in t h e message buffer.

(always line 1) (always line 2) (a maximum of 22 messagescan be displayed)

I
I

Function keys < F1 > t o <F8> Function keys <F9> t o <F16> ~ e ~ b r$ a o

I
I

(line 24)

Acknowledgment: initiated by means of function key

+ Function keys <F1

> t o <F8> Function keys <F9> t o <F16> The remaining keys have no significance f o r the message feature.

Figure 3-8: Overview

Siemens AG C79000-68576-07 7-0 1

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

STEP 5 Example of Messages

(See also structure diagram, Figure 3-7) This function block causes messages t o be transferred from the SS-135UlR processor t o the CP 526. The parameters are defined as follows: JOB# Job number of the display on the CP 526 monitor into which the transferred messages are entered ( = job number in the corresponding display output command of the CP 526 program). Format: KF Number of the data block that contains the messages t o be transmitted. Format: KF Number of data words being transmitted (including the header of the message record). Format: KF Location providing information concerning the results of processing this function block. Format: F Y The following meanings apply:

DB#

SIZE

INFO

< INFO > = 0 + Correct processing of the messages

<INFO> = 1 + < INFO> = 2 + < INFO> = 3 + Repeatcall Messages currently being transferred Basic error. Review the application program structure and message data block.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

< INFO > = 4 + CP 526 message buffer has an overflow. Wait

until some o f the transferred messages are acknowledged and the message buffer has free space again. Then retry.

The function block uses data block DB197, which has the following structure: Data words 0, 1,2, and 3 contain t h e actual parameters for SSNR, ANR and ANZW w i t h indirect parameter assignment o f the SEND-DIRECT data handling block Job status w o r d Continuation job status word Data words 6,7,8, and 9 contain the actual parameters for the source parameters w i t h the indirect parameter assignment (QTYP: XX) t o the SEND-DIRECT data handling block I t has t o be KF = 7 i f n o process variable has been stored. If one has been stored, i t has t o be KF = 9 for DW9. Unassigned Status word; identical t o formal operand INFO Identical t o formal operand JOB# Data handling blocks CONTROL-ALL, CONTROL-DIRECT and SEND-DIRECT, i n each case w i t h indirect parameters for SSNR, ANR, ANZW and the source parameters, are used, as well as flag byte FY 197. FY 197, DB 197lDW4 and DW 1 1 must be reset i n the restart routines.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

NAME :M ESSAGE DECL: JOB# I/Q/D/B/T/C: D DECL: DB# I/Q/D/BlT/C: D DECL: WORD I/Q/D/BlT/C: D DECL:SIZE I/Q/D/BlT/C: D DECL: INFO I/Q/D/B/T/C: Q 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 001 B OOlC 001 D 001 E 0020 002 1 0022 NAME 0023 SSNR 0024 A-NR 0025 ANZW 0026 PAFE 0027 0028 0029 002B 002C 002D 002E 002F 0030 003 1 0032M005 0034 0035 0036 NAME 0037 SSNR
:C :LW :T :LW :T :LW :T :LW :T

KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KUKG: KF KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KUKG : KF KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KUKG: KF KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KUKG: KF BIIBYNVID: BY LOAD ACTUAL PARAMETERS INTO DB198

DB197 =DB# DW7 =WORD DW8 =SIZE DW9 =JOB# DW12

:L KF+O :T DW1 :JU FBI23 :CONTROL : KY255,O : KY0,O : DWO : FY 197 :JC =M001 :L DW12 :L KF+O :! = F :JC =M005 :L DW12 :L DW4 :><F :JC =M001 :L KF+219 :T DW1 :JU FBI23 :CONTROL : KY255,O

ENTER A-NR = 0 (ALL FUNCTIONS) AND CALL CONTROL-ALL

PAFE> CO (RLO = l ) ? YES, ERROR, -->STATUS = 1 NO, ISTHE JOB NUMBER OFTHE DISPLAY RELEVANT? NO YES, IS IT THE DESIRED DISPLAY?

NO, -->STATUS = 1 YES, LOAD A-NR = 219 (DIRECT FCT) AND CALL CONTROL-DIRECT

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

0038 A-NR : KY O,O 0039 ANZW : DWO 003A PAFE : FY 197 003B :JC =MOO1 003C 0030 :L DW11 003E :L KF+1 0040 :>F :JC = MOO2 004 1 0042 :A D4.1 0044 :JC =M001 0045 0046 :JU FBI20 0047 NAME :SEND 0048 SSNR : KY255,O 0049 A-NR : KY0,O 004A ANZW: DWO 004B QTYP : KSXX 004C DBNR : KY 0,197 0040 QANF : KF + 6 004E QLAE : KF+O 004F PAFE : FY 197 0050 :JC =M001 005 1 :L DW4 0052 :L KF+2 0054 :JU =M003 0055 0056 M001 :L KF + 1 0058 :JU =M003 0059 005A M002 :A D 4.1 005C :JC = M004 OOSD :A D4.2 OOSF :L KF+O 006 1 :JC = M003 0062 :A D 4.3 0064 :AN D4.8 0066 :A D4.9 0068 :A D4.10 006A :AN D4.11

PAFE><O (RLO= l ) ? YES, ERROR--> STATUS = 1 NO, STATUS > 1 ?

YES NO, IS A JOB BE1NG PROCESSED? YES NO, CALL SEND-DIRECT

PAFE> < O (RLO = 1) YES, ERROR, -->STATUS = 1 NO, JOB IS BEING PROCESSED! SET STATUS = 2

SETSTATUS = 1

IS THE JOB STILL BEING PROCESSED? YES NO, DID IT FINISH WITHOUT ERROR? SETSTATUS = 0 YES NO, DOES AN ERROR EXIST BECAUSE OF CURRENT FIRMWARE STATUS OF THE CP 526 ?

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27-0 7 7

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

KF+ 1 = M003 D 4.3 D 4.8 D 4.9 D 4.10 D4.11 KF+4 = M003 KF + 3

LOAD STATUS l YES, REPEAT CALL NO, DOES THE CP 526 MESSAGE BUFFER HAVE AN OVERFLOW?

LOAD STATUS = 4 YES NO, LOAD STATUS = 3 STORE STATUS BLOCK END

= INFO DW11

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

[Link]

Message Texts

Every message text that is generated contains the name "MXXXX" (where "XXXX" i s a number between 0001 and 1000). The message text i s stored under this name in the user memory o f the C 526. The maximum number o f messages P is 1000. If the message number "WXYZ" occurs during operation, the message text MWXYZ is assigned t o it. A message text consists o f up t o 69 characters and appears beginning in column 3 o f a message display line and ends at column 71. The message text contains the fol Iowing information: Group number - The message text is displayed only i f the appropriate group has been selected. Display attribute - Basic color of the message text Date and time area (optional)- Mode of representation is programmable Area for inserting a process variable. Acknowledgment area - Display o f the message status in the message buffer of the CP 526 The process variable must be stored in data words DW7 and DW8 of the 'MELD' data block (Figure 3-8).The type of the process variable is defined. i n the second byte of the data block. All S5 data formats are permitted, including the type 'character string'. The process variable can be up t o four bytes long.

[Link]

Message Structure

After the command DISPLAY MESSAGE has been activated in the C 526 P (keyboard entry or controller job), the screen is cleared and the message screen is displayed. When the screen i s cleared, the last incoming message in the message line is deleted, and you cannot enter any new commands. The function keys < F1 > through <F16> have new functions for the message screen. Additional controller job commands are stored i n the C 526 and are evaluated after the P command line is exited.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-C2 17-0 1

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

A job for transmitting the key codes will continue t o be recognized by the C 526, P allowing the message line t o be serviced from the controller or keyboard.

Colums 1 and 2, as well as colums 72 t o 80, of the message screen are reserved. The cursor is in column 1 (shown as a square at the center of the character), pointing t o the message being [Link] 2 and 72 are blank columns. Columns 73 t o 80 are reserved (see the message screen i n Figure 3-9). The message line (line 1) always shows the text o f the last message received or of the last message received and gone. The text corresponds t o the text i n the process display. The acknowledgment area (message status) is not shown i n the message Iine. If the text does not exist in the C 526 user memory, the message is P discarded. The number of messages in the message buffer isshown in columns 73 t o 80. If the message buffer in the CP 526 overflows, the message Iine blinks and indicates the number of overflow messages. The second line of the message screen is the header line. Columns 73 t o 80 show the number of the first message in the message screen. The current date and time are also shown in this line (columns 3 t o 20). The current values o f the date and time are continuously updated from the CP 526 internal clock. The heading programmed with COM appears in columns 21 t o 71. The first 22 messagesfrom the message buffer appear i n the remaining lines. The CP 526 cannot yet distinguish between message groups after it displays the message screen. The cursor is in the first column of the third Iine, pointing t o the first displayed message i n the message screen. You can now use the function keys t o process the messages.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-0 7

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

12/20/87 10:45:50 12/23/87 09:23:56 12/16/87 04:56:56 12/18/87 etc. 10/01/88 12:15:14

Always the last message received Heading for message group X Fault in Warehouse 23 Close valve number 8 a t 10 o'clock

Furnace l 5 overheated: 513 deg. C

Figure 3-9: Message Screen The text within the acknowledgment area has a different attri bute, depending on the state of the message. There are four different message states, and four different display modes for the acknowledgment area. These are the same for all messages. The date and time area cannot be the acknowledgment area and is always displayed in the basic color of the message text.
If additional messages occur while the message display i s being viewed, the additional messages are displayed i n the message line (first line in the message screen) and after the last incoming message.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-V1 7-0 7

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

Processing the Message Screen w i t h the Function Keys The following information describes the default functions of the 16 function keys. You can reprogram each o f the function keys with COM.
UP> key. Pressingthis key moves the cursor up one line at a time. If the cursor is in the first line o f the message screen, pressing the < F1 > key causes the messages t o move down one line at a time (i.e. F 1 performs the function of the F 2 key).

< F 1 > key - performs the same function as the <LINE

key - performs the same function as the <LINE DOWN > key. Pressing this key moves the cursor down one line at a time. If the cursor is i n the last line o f the message image, pressing this key causes the messages t o move up one line at a time (i. e. F 9 performs the function of the F 1 0 key).

< F9>

< F2> key - causes the displayed messages t o move down one line at a time. The next (or older) message becomes visible at the top of the display. If the first message o f the message buffer is displayed, however, pressing this key has no effect, and the cursor stays where it is.
< F 1 0 > key - causes the displayed messages t o move up one line at a time. The next message appears on the bottom of the screen. If the last message of the message buffer is at the bottom of the display, however, pressing this key has no effect, and the cursor stays where i t is.

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

< F3 > key - causes the previous 20 messages t o be displayed on the screen. The cursor remains at the beginning of the Iine displaying the first message. If you reach the beginning of the message buffer, however, pressing this key has n o effect.
< F1 1 > key - causes the next 20 messages t o be displayed on the screen. The
cursor remainsat the beginning o f the Iine displaying the first message. If you reach the end o f the message buffer, pressing this key has no effect. key - causes the first 20 messages i n the message buffer t o be displayed on the screen. The cursor remains at the beginning of the Iine displaying the first message.

< F4>

< F12> key - causes the last 20 messages in the message buffer t o be displayed on the screen. The cursor remains at the beginning of the line displaying the last message. < F1 3 > key - causes the number o f the message a t the current cursor position t o be written into the data block (ACK) and transmitted t o the controller. After the controller confirms the acknowledgment of the message, the message is identified as "acknowledged" in the communications processor. A message is retrieved from the message buffer if it had the following state before the acknowledgment:
a) b)
It has come and gone (back t o normal). It has come, been acknowledged, and gone (back t o normal).

The remaining messages then move up one line i n the message screen.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-V 17-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

key - causes the numbers of all messages displayed in the screen t o be written into the data block (ACK) and transmitted t o the controller. After the controller confirms the acknowledgment of the messages, the messages are identified as "acknowledged" in the CP. A message is retrieved from the message buffer if it had the following state before the acknowledgment: a) It has come and gone (back t o normal). b) It has come, been acknowledged, and gone (back t o normal). The remaining messages then move up one line in the message display.

< F5>

< F16 > key - causes the displayed message screen t o be deleted, and the previously displayed picture reappears.
<F6>, <F14>, <F7>, and <F15> keys < F6> causes those messages that belong t o message group 1 t o be displayed in the message screen. The same holds true for the < F14 >, < F7 >, and < F 15 > keys for message groups 2,3,and 4, respectivelyThe cursor position in the message display does not change.

key After you press the < GR 1...4> key, all messages are displayed again. There is no distinction by message group.
<F8>

Siemens AG C79000-68576-0 17-07

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

[Link]

Message Exchange Between the Programmable Controller and the

CP 526
Messages are exchanged between the programmable controller and the CP 526 through a data block that is transferred with a SEND-DIRECT and a programmable job number. The execution sequence is shown in the structogram for the "Transfer of Messages between the programmable controller and CP 526" i n Figure 3-7.

If more than one C U is used in a programmable controller the 1000 message P texts will have t o be distributed t o the individual CPUs. This e.g. means:
1 through 500 First CPU: message text nos. Second CPU: message text nos. 501 through 1000

etc. This ensures that the message text will be displayed in the corresponding CP if a message is output by a CPU. If a message i s acknowledged in the CP 526 i t is also ensured that the acknowledgement will be transferred t o the corresponding CPU. When filling up the data block, make sure that you enter the correct number of data words, as well as valid data, into the message blocks. The CP 526 does not check the data.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

Data Word

(001 ...7FFH = 2047D) e.g. 28.10.87 14.15 16sec. 700msec. l/l 0 seconds 70H

14H

28H

in BCD code

Information about the first message ( l s t message block)

Process variable with max. 4 bytes (is not evaluated by the CP 526)

Figure 3-10: Structure of the Data Block (MELD)

Siemens AG C79000-68576-017-01

Programmable Controiler Interface

Chapter 3

If byte 2 (type of process variable) contains the value FF (hexadecimal), no process variable is contained in the data block. The next message then begins at DW7. P With other assignments of byte 2, the C 526 does not take the contents of DW7 and DW8 into account. The message status indicates whether a message has come, gone, or been acknowledged by the controller. Here are the possibilities: xxxx xxOO + xxxx xx0l + xxxx xx l 0 + message gone (back t o normal) message has come (fault) acknowledgment ( message acknowledged)

The message number refers t o the corresponding message text in the user memory (refer t o subsection [Link]). Acknowledgment Exchange Between Programmable Controller and CP 526 Acknowledgments are exchanged between the controller and C 526 through a P data block that is transferred with a RECEIVE-ALL. The number of the data block can be programmed when assigning the C parameters (see Planning Guide P COM GRAPH ). The job number corresponds t o the configurable job number for "Display message screen." Data word
Byte 0
DWO 05H

Identifier for acknowledgment Number of words without header

Byte 1 Byte 2
DW1

Length

0 0 0 0

NNN
Message number

Byte 3

NNNNNNNN

Figure 3-1 1: Structure of the Data Block (QUIT)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter3

Programmable Controller Interface

If a message is acknowledged from the keyboard, the message number is written into the data block, and the latter i s transferred t o the controller with a RECEIVEALL. The application program in the controller must then confirm the acknowledgment for the CP 526 with a SEND-DIRECT. Only after this confirmation is received are the acknowledgments processed in the CP 526. If the data block contains an acknowledgment with a message text number that is not in the message buffer, it i s discarded by the CP 526. If all the messages that are displayed in the message screen are acknowledged, a maximum of 22 message numbers i s entered in the data block.

3.3.7

Emulation of the Process Keyboard

All key sequences that you can enter via the process keyboard can also be emulated by the controller with a special job number. To do this, you write the

required key codes of the process keyboard into a data block, and then transfer this data block by means of a SEND-DIRECT with the job number for messages (default value: 219). The job order numbers can be set when you assign CP parameters with COM. Data word
Byte 0

64H
Length
31 H
32H Key Code Key Code Key Code Key Code

Identifier for Key Codes Number of Key Codes < 41

DWO
Byte 1 Byte 2
DW1

Example Example Example Example

Byte 3 Byte 4
DW2

33 H
34H

Byte 5

Figure 3-1 2: Structure of the Data Block

Siemens AG C79000-138576-C217-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

You can transmit a maximum of 40 key codes (key activations) with one SENDDIRECT. The CP 526 interprets the data as i f it came from a keyboard, and, starting at the current cursor position, writes the key codes into the input field or into the command line of the process display. At this point, the CP 526 can no longer distinguish between a key code coming from the controller or one coming from the keyboard. The controller can write all the key codes into the data block, including those for the < F1 > through < F16> function keys as well as the cursor control keys.
NOTE: When transmitting key codes, the number X of data words t o be transmitted (parameters of the data handling blocks SEND-DIRECT A-NRxxx) must correspond to the number y of the key code bytes to be transmitted (right-hand byte of the first data word) where number y is specified in the associated data block. The following holds true: If y is even, X = y/2 + 1. If y is odd, X = (y + 1)/2 + 1. An error can occur if you do not adhere to these calculations.

Only one function key or one enabling character can be contained in a data block. Enabling characters include the following: Cursor control keys Key code "ODH" (key 1 1 = <RETURN > key) Key code " E7H/A7HM (key 12 = cursor t o the left with delete) If other key codes follow, this will cause errors during processing. ASCII characters can precede the function key code or the enabling character code.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller interface

The number o f ASCII characters contained i n one data block must correspond t o the length o f the currently addressed input field. If more characters are transferred, they are discarded. You cannot transfer key codes from the controller while you are entering characters through the process keyboard. This mixed operation can cause illegal operating states in the C 526. P In addition, you cannot enter key codes from the controller if: the C 526 is in the "PROGRAMMING DISPLAYS" mode, or P changes i n the user memory (delete, transfer) are being made by the COM program. In these cases, set the C 526 mode selector t o the "STOP" position. P Also note that the C 526 still needs time t o construct a display or verify an input P value. The C 526 can only receive another string of key codes after a job has P been completely executed. Example: Activating a display output command (BILD XY) through the controller keyboard, and entering the value 1234 in i t s first input field. Steps 1. Move cursor t o command line 2. Command name 3. Move cursor t o first input field 4. Input value

95h 'BILD XY' 91h 97h '1234'91h

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

The third step is accepted by the CP 526 only when the display output command has been completed (the first input field is defined and the cursor is waiting for an input). Otherwise, the controller job (analogous to input via the process keyboard) is discarded and a negative acknowledgment is given. Consequently, the checks shown in the flowchart of Figure 3-1 1 must be performed in the controller program. The subsequent STEP 5 program shows, for example, one possibility for implementing key codes in the 55-135U with R processor.
NOTE: The CP 526 recognizes another cursor control character other than the keyboard

codes (see Figure 3-24) that allows you t o position the cursor at an arbitrary input field. You cannot enter this control character, however, through the process keyboard. With 7Fh line column (line: 00..17h, column: 00..4Fh), the cursor i s set to the corresponding position within the display, provided an input field has been configured there. Otherwise, the error message "W04" appears and the cursor waits in the command line for further input.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C21 7-0 7

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

Kev code A N R : Job number of the command that is currently being processed by the CP.

CONTROL

IS display the needed for N

P A F E : Parameter assignment error (see description of the handling blocks) A N Z W : Display word (see description of the handling blocks)

CONTROL 219

B E : End of block A N Z E : Display cell (see next page)

This kev code has already been transferred.

Y
This key code job is not yet

*
key code is N being processed.
V

SENDDR 219

Y
Key code finished Processing.

Y
Subsequent repeat makes sense. ANZE := 1

sense.

Key code has N been accepted. ANZE := 2

processed.

with error. ANZE :=S subseq. repeat makes sense. ANZE :=l

ANZE :=0

Figure 3-13: Flowchart "Processing a Key Code Job"

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C27-07 7

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

STEP 5 Example for Key Code

This function block transmits the key code from the SS-135U w i t h R processor t o the CP 526 communications processor. The parameters are defined as follows:
- Formal parameter:

JOB#

Job number o f the display on the CP 526 monitor, on which the key codes that are being transmitted are t o act (job number in the corresponding display output command o f the CP 526). A-NR = 0 means that the job number of the display selected i s irrelevant. Format: KF Number of the data block that contains the key code t o be transmitted. Format: KF Number of the data word in the data block that contains the first data word t o be transmitted. Format: KF Number of data words t o be transmitted. Format: KF Location that provides information concerning results of processing this function block. Format: FY The following INFO values apply:

DB#

WORD

SIZE INFO
.

< INFO > < INFO>

=0 + = 1 +

< INFO > = 2 + < INFO > = 3 +

The last key code has been correctly processed. The call should be repeated w i t h the same key code. A key code i s currently being processed. Basic error. Review the application program structure.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

The handling block uses data block DB198, which has t h e following structure: Data words 0, 1,2, and 3 contain t h e actual parameters for SSNR, A-NR, ANZW, with indirect parameter assignment t o the SEND-DIRECT data handling block. Job status word Continuation j o b status w o r d Data words 6,7,8, and 9 contain t h e actual parameters f o r t h e source parameters w i t h indirect parameter assignment (QTYP: XX) t o t h e SEND-DIRECT data handling block Unassigned Statusword, identical with the formal operand INFO Identical w i t h t h e formal operand JOB# The data handling blocks CONTROL-ALL, CONTROL-DIRECT, and SEND-DIRECT are always used w i t h indirect assignment o f t h e SSNR, A-NR, and ANZW parameters, and the source parameters, as well as flag byte FY 198. FY 198, DB 198lDW4, and DW 1 1 must b e reset in t h e restart routines. NAME DECL DECL DECL DECL DECL
:KEY-CODE :JOB# :DB# :WORD :SIZE :INFO

I/Q/D/B/T/C: I/Q/D/B/T/C: I/Q/D/B/T/C: I/Q/D/B/T/C: I/Q/D/B/T/C:

D D D D A

KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KUKG: KF KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KUKG : K F KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KUKG: KF KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KUKG : KF BI/BY/W/D: BY

:C

DB198 LOAD ACTUAL PARAMETERS INTO DB198

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

001A 001B 001C 001 D 001 E 001 F 002 1 0022 0023 NAME 0024 SSNR 0025 A-NR 0026 ANZW 0027 PAFE 0028 0029 OOZA 002B 002D 002E 002F 0030 003 1 0032 0033M005 0035 0036 0037 NAME 0038 SSNR 0039 A-NR 003A ANZW 003B PAFE 003C 003D 003E 003F 004 1 0042 0043 0045 0046

:LW :T :LW :T

=SIZE DW9 =JOB# DW12 ENTER A-NR = 0 (ALL FUNCTIONS) AND CALL CONTROL-ALL

:L KF+O :T DW1 :JU FBI23 :CONTROL : KY255,O : KY 0O , : DWO : FY 198 :JC =M001 :L DW12 :L KF+O :!=F :JC = M002 :L DW12 :L DW4 :><F :JC =M001 :L KF+219 :T DW1 :JU FBI23 :CONTROL : KY255,O : KY0,O : DWO : FY 198 :JC =M001 :L :L :>F :JC :A :JC DW11 KF+1

PAFE > < 0 (RLO = l ) ? YES; ERROR, -->STATUS = 1 NO; IS DISPLAYED JOB NUMBER RELEVANT? NO YES, DESIRED DISPLAY?

NO, -->STATUS = 1 YES, LOAD A-NR= 219 (DIRECT FCT) AND CALL CONTROL-DIRECT

PAFE > < 0 (RLO = l ) ? YES, ERROR -->STATUS = 1 NO, STATUS

> 1?

= M003
D4,1 =M001

YES NO, IS A JOB BEING PROCESSED? YES

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

0047 0049 004B 004C 004D 004E 004F 0050 005 1 0052 0053 0054 0055 NAME 0056 SSNR 0057 A-NR 0058 ANZW 0059 QTYP 005A DBNR 005B QANF 005C QLAE 005D PAFE 005E 005F 0060 006 1 0063 0064 0065MOOl 0067 0068 0069 M002 006B 006C 006D 006E 007 1 0072

:AN :AN :R :A :AN :S :A :=

D D F F F F F F

0.9 0.10 98.0 98.2 98.1 98.0 98.2 98.1

:A F 98.0 :JU FBI20 :SEND : KY255,O : KY0,O : DWO : KSXX : KYO, 198 : KF+6 : KF+O : FY 198 :JC =MOO1 :L :L :JU :L :JU :A :JC
:A

NO, CALL SEND-DIRECT

PAFE > <0 (RLO = l ) ? YES, ERROR, -->STATUS = 1 NO, JOB IS BEING PROCESSED! SETSTATUS = 2

DW4 KF+2 =M003 KF+1 =M003 D 4.1 = M004 D4.2 KF+O = M003

SETSTATUS = 1

IS THE JOB STILL RUNNING?

:L :JC

NO, DID IT FINISH WITHOUT ERROR? SETSTATUS = 0 YES

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Programmab/e Controller Interface

Chapter 3

D 4.3 D 4.9 D4.10 KF+ 1 = M003 KF + 3

NO, DOES A N ERROR EXIST BECAUSE OF INSTANTANEOUS FIRMWARE STATUS OF THE CP 526? LOAD STATUS l YES NO, LOAD STATUS = 3 STORE STATUS

= INFO

DWl l

Network 2 0084

0084 :BE

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C27-0 7 1

Chapter 3

Programmable Controller Interface

3.3.8

Exchange of Date and Time Between the Controller and the CP 526

When the date and time are exchanged between the controller and the CP 526, the following occurs: -

The controller reads the time on the C 526. P The controller writes the time on the CP 526. The C 526 uses the MASTER clock t o set the time. P Clocks o f several CPs are synchronized.

These exchanges take place exclusively through the SEND-DIRECT and RECEIVEDIRECT data handling blocks with job number 2 18. The data transfer area has the following structure:

Byte addr.
OOh 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h 09h

I
I

Contents
MASTER Identifier

Remarks
Bit 0 = l : CP 527 is time master

I
1/10

Unassigned

1/1oos

All t ~ m specifications in BCD e

month

Figure 3-14: Structure o f the Data Transfer Area

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Programmable Controller Interface

Chapter 3

W i t h a SEND-DIRECT 218, the following applies:

- A CP 526 can be declared t o be t h e time master. - The date and time can be transferred t o a CP 526 o r a CP 526 can simultaneously be declared t h e t i m e master.
W i t h a RECEIVE-DIRECT 218, the following applies:
- The date and time can be read from the CP 526, i f t h e CP 526 was previously declared t h e time master.

When transmitting 10 bytes through t h e controller, the date and time are transferred t o the CP 526, and the CP 526 is reinitialized. I f the CP 526 was previously the time master, and i f this condition continues, the master identifier must be transferred once again w i t h the data. When the controller reads the date and time from the CP 526, the CP 526 always transfers 10 bytes t o the data transfer area, thus allowing the controller t o evaluate the master identifier of t h e CP 526. After a cold restart, a CP 526 behaves Ii ke a time slave and updates its clock only if i t receives a job request from the controller. If t h e CP 526 is then declared t o be time master, i t keeps the date and time ready so that i t can transfer i t as quickly as possible w i t h a RECEIVE-DIRECT 218. Please note that a PLC-SYNCHRON does n o t change the master identifier o n t h e CP.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

Interface to Keyboard and Programmer

3.4

Interface to Keyboard and Programmer

You can connect either the process keyboard or a programmer (PG) to the CP 526 through the 15-pin female "D" type connector on the front panel. (Be sure to use the correct connecting cable.) The CP 526 automatically recognizes which unit is connected and automatically switches into the correct operating mode ("OPERATOR COMMUNICATION AND VISUALIZATION" or "PROGRAMMING" mode). Either in the "Configuration" as in the " Operator-Process Communication and Visualization" mode, the data is transferred through a serial current-loop interface (the process keyboard is passive). The power supply for the keyboard (24 V) i s taken from the controller rack power supply. When you use standardized connecting cables, you do not have t o worry about the connector pin assignments. However, these diagrams are shown in section 3.10 if you wish t o refer to them.

3.5

Memory Submodules

The CP 526 memory submodules contain all of the necessary display information for, as well as the associated executive information. The Planning Guide COM GRAPH contains specifications for the memory requirements of your programs. You can use either EPROM or RAM submodules. When a RAM submodule i s used, it is battery-backedthrough the backplane bus of the programmable controller. If the RAM submodule or the entire printed circuit board i s pulled out, the application programs are lost.

Siemens A t C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Technical Specifications

Chapter 3

3.6
3.6.1

Technical Specifications
Operating and Environmental Conditions
IP 00

Degree o f protection t o DIN 40050lIEC 144 Permissible ambient temperature

- operating (with forced ventilation)

0 t o 5SC

- non operating
Humidity class t o DIN 40050 Operating altitude

- 40to+70C
Code F, noncondensing

Up t o 1500 m above sea-level

3.6.2

Mechanical and Electrical Data 0.55 kg Double-height Eurocard (160 mm x 233.4 mm) 20.32 mm
ES 902, range 2,48-pin

Weight Printed circuit board format Front panel width Backplane connector Front connector

Female multipoint conn., 15-pin 4 coaxial BNC connectors (color) 1 coaxial BNC connector (monochrome)

Supply voltages

+ 5 V, tolerance 5% + 24 V, tolerance + 251- 15%

Siemens AG C79000-68576-U 7-0 1 1

Chapter 3

Technical Specifications

Current consumption Battery current (min. 2.7 V)

+ 5 V: 2,2 A + 24 V: max 40 mA1)

50 microamp typ.

3.6.3

Logic Data
INTEL 80188 5 MHz, CMOS

Microprocessor

Memory configuration
- RAM - dual-port RAM

- character generator - display refresh memory

- memory submodule - operating system EPROMs

8 kbyte 2 kbyte (l page frame + interprocessor communication flags) 8 kbyte (256 characterslsymbols) 8 kbyte (characters and attributes) 128 kbyte (maximum) 128 kbyte (maximum) 50 - 9600 bitslsec. TTY(20 mA), max. 1 km

Serial interface

Color CRT controllerz)

- principle - display refresh frequency - line frequency

Character graphics 60 Hz 30.87 or 15.44 kHz

1)

The process keyboard draws an additional approximately 200 mA. You can modify various parameters with COM (see also subsection [Link]) in order t o adapt the display most conveniently t o your monitor. Note, however, that COM does not support the checking of the symbol set construction-The monochrome module is assigned i t s parameters in a manner similar t o the color version, but the lower resolution must be selected.

2)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-V 17-01

Technical Specificstions

Chapter 3

- display format - resolution - raster field - colors

- gray shades

26 lines, 80 characterslline 640 X 468 (234) pixels 8 x 18 (9) pixels 8 colors each for the character foreground and background black, red, green, blue, yellow, cyan, magenta, white With the monochrome version of the CP 526, gray shades from 0 t o 7 are uniquely assigned t o the 8 color designations. This is explained i n the following table (the brightness of the gray shades increases from top t o bottom):

Color Designation black green red ye1low blue cya n magenta white

Gray Shade 0 1 2 3
4 5

6 7

Siemens A G C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Technical Specifications

- character set

-flashing - display mix Video Signals

Standard (ASCII) w i t h 7 nationalities + 128 symbols t h a t can be loaded-Various national character sets can be loaded i n t o the CP 526. Even the cyrillic character set can be loaded. In this case, Latin lowercase letters are replaced by cyrillic uppercase letters (see also [Link]). 1 flashing frequency Priority-controlled combination from character and pixel graphics

- colors
- monochrome

Red, green, blue, and SYNC separately Red, greenISYNC, blue GreenISYNC jointly Standard BAS signal o n the coaxial jack o f the front panel Triaxial cable max. 80 m (high resolution) max. 100 m (low resolution)

Monitor connection

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C21 7-0 1

lnstallation Guidelines

Chapter 3

3.7
3.7.1

Installation Guidelines
Module Slots for the CP 526 in the Programmable Controller

The CP 526 modules can be plugged into the specified slots of the following programmable controllers :
Subrack/Controller PLC 55-115U C 700-2 R ER701-3
CR 700-3

Slot-in module

Slot No.

Basic module 1) Bas~c module Bas~c module 3) Expans~on board 4,

0.1,2,3,4,5 0,1,2,3,4,5,6 Oa,Ob, l a , lb,Za,Zb,3,4,5 Ob, 1b. 2b

PLC SS-135U ZG 135 U EG 185U Bas~c module 7, Bas~c module 7, 11,19,27,35,43,51,59,67,

19,27,35,43,51,59,67,75,83,
91,99,107,115,123,131,139

PLC 55-150U
ZG 150U

Bas~c module7) Bas~c module7)

3 5 . 11 5), 19 5. 107, 115, 123, ) ) 131,1396). 1476)

EG 185 U

19,27,35,43,51,59,67,75,83, 91,99,107,115,123,131,139

PLC 55-155U ZG 155U Baslc module7) 19,35,43,51,59,75,

83,91,99,107,115,123,131

139 6), 147 6)

1)

2)

3)
4)

5)

6)
7)

Adapter casing is required! One module per casing. Not with Interface Module 31 1 ! In versions with natural ventilation, 1 module per slot only. Only together with basic module in 1 casing. Only in conjunction with jumpering module 756. Only possible after changing jumpers on the bus PCB. The expansion board is inserted into the next highest slot.

Table 3-1 : Module Slots in the Programmable Controller

3-62

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Chapter 3

lnstallation Guidelines

3.7.2

Inserting and Removing the CP 526

CAUTION ! Do not plug in or withdraw the CP 526 module when the power is on.

373 ..

Installation Guidelines for Keyboard, Programmer and Monitor

You must take the following shielding measures to preclude any future problems with disturbance and faults in your programmablecontroller system. If your system is badly grounded or not shielded, low-frequency andlor highfrequency noise signals may be coupled into the internal bus of the programmable controller. Under infavorable circumstances, this may cause the programmable controller to enter the STOP mode. Noise can be caused, for example, by switching relays or contactors (high rates of current/voltage variation, HF disturbance) or by different Ground potentials between two parts of the system (N F disturbance). The following installation guidelines cover the following areas:
- Operation and installation of noiseproof cables - Noiseproof hardware configuration - S5 cabinet - Monitor connection

Siemens A G C79000-88576-U 7-0 1 1

installation Guidelines

Chapter 3

[Link]

Operation/lnstallation of Noiseproof Cables

The shielding of all connecting cables between the C 526 and the process P keyboardlprograrnmer must be grounded a t both ends. The standard cables listed i n Catalog ST80 and under ORDERING INFORMATION (section 2.4) meet this requirement. Triaxial cables with double shielding are available for connecting the monitor in M environments with severe E 1 (electromagnetic interference). These can be used up t o a length o f 80 m without the need for any additional measures. NOTE: Do not run monitor cables or the connecting cables between the CP 526 and the process keyboardlprograrnmer parallel t o power cables. Use separate cable racks guaranteeing a clearance o f at least 50 cm for the power cables. Differences in the ground potential between subracks and the monitor housing can cause monitor "humming" (dark horizontal bars across the display). For this reason, and also t o provide protection against accidental contact (shocks), run an equi potential bonding conductor between the S5 cabinet and the monitor housing. Design this equipotential bonding conductor on the basis of measurements taken in the system t o limit the maximum possible potential difference t o 200 mV. Connect the monitor and programmable controller t o the same phase o f the power system.

[Link]

Noise-proof Hardware Packaging

The general hardware packaging o f the control equipment is the basis for noiseproof operation o f the programmable controllers. This means suppressing any noise signals emulating from the process.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-07

Chapter 3

Installation Guidelines

Make sure that all the shielding measures etc. in the EMC guidelines "hardware installation guide1ines or SIMATIC S5 (programmable controllers of the U range)" are observed. If these hardware installation guidelines are not observed, noise signals may propagate into the hardware and thus disturb program execution. The main measures t o be taken are described below.

S5 cabinet
Figure 3-14 gives an example of an S5 cabinet. As can be seen from the figure, devices that could cause noise signals t o enter the cabinet from the outside are located at the bottom. The grounding bar must be installed directly at t h e point where the cable enters the cabinet t o connect cables carrying noise signals, e.g. monitor cables, connecting cables for the process keyboard can be connected before they can carry noise signals into the cabinet. All shielded cables (with the exception o f coaxial cables with si nqle shielding) must be connected t o this bar. in the case o f signal cables w i t h 2 shields, only the external shield need be connected. Signal cables must also be run along the cabinet walls. A n EMC-compatible cabinet configuration is important for reducing noise. In this connection, make sure that all ground connections inside the cabinet make largearea contact.
CAUTION ! All analog devices in the cabinet must be isolated and grounded at a central point in the cabinet (use a copper strip).

All metal-to-metal connections must be clean (remove any paint). If necessary, use additional angle brackets for attaching the ground bars.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

installation Guidelines

Chapter 3

Grounding bar External cable shield

used (3x1

I Groundina Doint

Keyboard
,Grounding bar

External cable shield used

3
Key:

U;

Ground connections with large-area contact (SSfmme, copper strip)

Figure 3-1 5: Cabinet Schematic

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-0 1

Chapter 3

Installation Guidelines

NOTE l In metal-to-metal connections always use metals of the same kind (never use aluminium because of the danger of oxidation).

All doors and sheet-metal parts (side panels, rear panel and roof) of the cabinet must be connected t o the cabinet frame at least three times by short connectors (remove any paint and ensure large-area contact).

NOTE 2 In the case of plants where high electrostatic charges may be generated (e.g. textile machines, special construction machines), the grounding conductor of the machine parts generating noise signals should be run t o a seperate system ground conductor isolated from the central grounding point of the S5 cabinet (grid ground with building structure, armouring).

Monitor connection Coaxial cables with double shieldings should be used in severely contaminated environments. Only the outer shield of the monitor cable has t o be connected t o the frame potential of the process monitor (see Fig. 3-16). In the case of a number of Siemens process monitors, the metal strain-relief clamp can be used for the monitor cables. With other process monitors, on the other hand, a grounding bar must be bolted t o the housing (accessory). Make sure that all metal-to-metal connections have a large contact area. The electronic ground of the monitor (see Fig. 3-16) must be isolated from the frame ground. Jumpers are provided with the Siemens monitors in most cases. The monitor and programmable controller should be connected t o the same system phase. When using monitors that can be operated only with a separate synchronizing signal, an extra cable (with cable clamp) must be used.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Installation Guidelines

Chapter 3

Special measures in connection with office monitors Monitors with internally metallized plastics housings (office monitors) are not suitable for use in environments contaminated with electromagnetic interference since the internal metal surfaces cannot be connected later t o the external earthing bar. It i s not possible t o isolate the electronic ground from the housing ground of the monitor in most cases as would be necessary in such environments. Such monitors can be used only in environments that are also suitable for personal computers. Such office monitors can be used in connection with single-shielded coaxial cables. Connection to the CP 52615271528 is therefore only possible under certain conditions since this cable i s only suitable for short distances. Disturbances can be avoided if the monitor and programmable controller are connected to the same reference potential or to the same system phase (via system filters). In the local range, this i s only possible by running a system cable from the programmable controller to the monitor. In connection with PLCs and similar automation equipment, the monitors should therefore always be connected t o the system power socket in the S5 cabinet.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27 7-07

Chapter 3

lnstallation Guidelines

Programmable

Grounding bar Shock protection. bonding conductor e.g. monochrome Process l keyboard

Electronic ground (0 V) is isolated from the frame ground

Electronic ground (0V) is to be isolated from ground in the monitor using the jumper

Figure 3-16: Cable Connections t o Ground

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Operation

Chapter 3

3.8

Operation

This chapter describes the operator control and display elements, as well as the jumper settings.

3.8.1

Operator Controls and Displays

A switch and three LEDs are located on the front panel of the CP 526. The switch allows you t o select the various operating modes, while the LEDs indicate the operating status of the CP 526.

3.8.2

Operating Modes

The switch on the front panel of the CP 526 controls the t w o operating modes, "STOP" and "RUN ". The "RUN " mode allows normal operation. The "STOP" mode prevents data exchange with the programmable controller, even though all other functions are fully operational. For normal operation, this switch must be in the "RUN" position. When programming, the mode selector must be in the "STOP" position. The device connected t o the serial port determines whether the CP 526 selects "Programming" mode or "Operator-process Communication and Visualization" mode. When the process keyboard andlor a printer i s connected, the "Operatorprocess Communication and Visualization" mode is selected. When a programmer (PG) is connected, "Programming" mode is selected. You can switch from "Programming" mode t o "Operator-process Communication and Visualization" mode via the COM program.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27-01 7

Chapter 3

Operation

3.8.3

Fault LEDs

The three LED indicators on the front panel provide information concerning the operating conditions of the CP 526. The following table describes the status and meaning of each combination of LED states:

RUN ON STOP ON C Fault P ON Meaning Reset condition This conditon occurs after power on or reset, for the duration of the reset Normal operating condition Thls cond~tion attained about three seconds after is power on and after reset (No informatron on the expansion board) Break condition This condition occurs ~fthe cable of the programmerlkeyboard serial communications link i s interrupted Exception. If, after resetting the PC, no connection is made t o the programmerlkeyboard STOP condition This condrtion occurs when the mode selector "STOP" posit~on

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

is

In the

OFF

ON

ON

Fault conditron. This condition occurs ~fa fault rs discovered d u r ~ n g system startup (self-test) or' Operatron mode switch on STOP and connection between programmerlkeyboard and C interrupted P

OFF ON OFF

OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF ON

Undefined states (module fault)

Table 3-2: Fault LEDs

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-01

Operation

Chapter 3

3.8.4

Jumper Settings

This section summarizes the CP 526 jumper functions and settings.

I Figures 3-1 and 3-2, the jumpers and jumper headers are shown i n the actual n
arrangement they have on the module. The CP 526 has various types o f jumpers (e. g. double and triple jumpers).
"X" identifies the jumpers and jumper headers.

The most significant jumper is marked by a " 1 ". Double jumpers are not specially marked. Inserted jumpers are shown w i t h infill
NOTE: The sketches show the jumpers as set i n the factory.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27-0 7 1

Chapter 3

Operation

[Link]

X6: Enabling or Disabling lnterprocessor Communication Flags

Jumper header X6 enables or disables the interprocessor communication flags.

'
1

Remarks - Jumper on = interprocessor communication flags enabled - Jumper off = interprocessor communication flags disabled

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Operation

Chapter 3

[Link]

X7: Module Address (Page Frame Number)

Jumper header X7 is used t o set the page frame number or vector address (see subsection 3.3.2) for the CP 526. There are 256 (0 to 255) possible settings. Using this number, you can address the CP 526 with the data handling blocks (interface number SSNR).

Remarks Jumper off = 0 (removed) Jumper on = 1 (inserted)

[Link]

X8: Page Window Base Address

For the page window base address, the following assignment between binary weights and the jumpers of header X 8 apply. - Base window address = F * 1 K, F = 0,1,2 t o 63 - Factory setting for 6 1 k (F = 6 1)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Operation

Remarks:

- Jumper off = 0 - Jumper on = 1

The data handling blocks supplied by SIEMENS are tailored t o the factory settings. The j urnper settings made in the factory must therefore not be changed.

[Link]

X9: Switching Between Page FrameILinear Addressing

With jumper header X9 the page framellinear addressing is selected: Page Frame Addressing: jumper 1 - 2 = off jumper 2 - 3 = on Linear Addressing : jumper 1 - 2 = on jumper 2 - 3 = off

When using the data handling blocks, you must not change this jumper setting.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-01

Operation

Chapter 3

[Link]

X10, X14: Jumper for Setting the Pixel Cycle

Jumper block X14 i s used t o specify the pixel cycle: High-Resolution Monitor Jumper 1 - 2 = on Jumper2-3 = off Low-Resolution Monitor Jumper 1 - 2 = off Jumper 2 - 3 = on Pixel cycle = 26.1818MHz Controller freq. = 3.2727 MHz Pixel cycle = 13.0909 MHz Controller freq. = 1.6364 MHz

Jumper X1 0 is used t o specify the type of video monitor: a high-resolution or a low-resolution monitor. Jumper on = high-resolution monitor) Jumper off = low-resolution monitor

CAUTlON ! The setting of jumper X1 0 must correspond t o the setting of jumper X14.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Operation

[Link]

X1 l: Jumper for Setting the Firmware Mode

Jumper on Jumper off

Module operates a a CP 52612 s Module operates as a CP 52611

[Link]

X17: Jumper for the SYNC Signal

Jumper header X17 is used to specify the channel on which the synchronization (SYNC) signal is output from the CP 526 monitor. This jumper allows you to pass the synchronization signal on the green channel (RGB-BAS), or to pass i t separately over its own cable. Please follow the operating instructions for your particular monitor. A: Jumper 1 - 2 = on Jumper 2 - 3 = off B: Jumper 1 - 2 = off Jumper 2 - 3 = on

SYNC signal separate

SYNC signal on green channel

CAUTION: In the case of the monochrome monitor, the SYNC signal is always the BAS (composite video signal) connection, so that jumper X17 must always be set to B.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-0 1

3-77

CP 526 Start-up

Chapter 3

3.8.5

Permanently Set Jumpers

All jumpers not mentioned in subsection 3.8.4are irrelevant. These jumpers are set at the factory and should not be changed.

CP 526 Start-up
Use the following checklist when starting up your CP 526:
1. 2.

Check the jumper settings on the C 526 module. P Make sure you have the correct EPROM firmware on your module: Location J33 No. 579200-G34-A905 Location J39 No. 579200-G34-A906

3. Turn off the power t o the programmable controller and plug the CP 526 module into i t s slot. 4.

Insert a RAM memory module into the receptacle in the front panel of the C P 526 module. Check the position of the mode selector on the module front panel. The selector must be in the "RUN" position i f you want t o exchange data with the programmable controller.

5.

6 . Connect up the process keyboard and turn the keylock switch t o "ON"

7. Connect the monitor-Make sure that the jumpers are properly set on the CP
526 for either high or low monitor resolution (X1 0, X14), and for proper channel specification of the synchronization signal (X1 7). Follow the operating instructions for your particular monitor.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Start-up

8. Turn the programmable controller back on. The monitor displays the START command STARTI. Enter START from the process keyboard, and press the <RETURN> key. The C 526 monitor redisplaysthe START command. P Besides the message (top) and command (bottom) lines, the display contains the current system data.1) On the front panel, the red or green LED lights up, depending on the switch position. If this does not happen, check the jumper settings.

9. If everything is 0. you can start normal operator-process communication K.,

procedures or generate new commands for your CP 526 with the programmer.

l)

On each cold restart, the CP 526 screens the display output command with the name "START." This display can also be called if no user card is plugged in or i f an EPROM or a RAM card is plugged i n that does not contain a command with the name "START."
If you want a different display on cold restart, you can program an arbitrary display output command with this name by means of COM, and transfer i t into the user memory of the CP 526.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

3.9.1

Connecting the Process Keyboard

The process keyboard is directly connected t o the serial interface o f the C 526 by P means o f the appropriate connecting cable (see 'Ordering Data'). The connector required for the serial interface o f the CP 526 i s described i n Table 3-6(subsection 3.10.3). The C 526 recognizes that a process keyboard i s connected and automatically P switches into the 'OPERATOR CONTROL AND PROCESS MONITORING*mode. As a consequence, the transmission parameters of the interface are adapted. On the process keyboard itself no adjustments have t o be made.

3.1 0

Connector Pin Assignments

The electrical interfaces o f the C 526 are specified in the following sections. P These interfaces include the following: Backplane connector Su bmodule connector Expansion module connector Keyboardlprogrammer connector Video output connectors (see Figure 3-1)

3.10.1

Backplane Connector

The C 526 is connected t o the wiring backplane o f the programmable controller P through t w o 48-pin, range 2 backplane connectors. The following tables show the pinout of these t w o connectors.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-01

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

ADB l l

---

---

---

Ground

---

Table 3-3: Backplane Connector 1

Siemens AG C79000-88576-V 7-0 1 1

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

Ground

+ 24 V

Table 3-4: Backplane Connector 2

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

3.10.2

Memory Submodule Connector

The CP 526 has a 48-pin, female multipoint connector for a RAM or EPROM memory submodule. The table below shows the pinout of this connector.
C

b
Ground SADB 1 SADB 4 SADB 7 SADB l0 SADB 14 SDB 8 SDB l 1 SDB 14 SDB 1 SDB 4 SDB 7 /CS3 submodule 1 JSTBY; /CS4

a
+ 5V
SADB 2 SADB 5 SADB 8 SADB 1 1

SADB 12 SADB 0 SADB 3 SADB 6 SADB 9 SADB 13

Ml

3
4

5
6

/R
SDB 9 SDB 12 SDB 15 SDB 2 SDB 5

7
8

SDB 10 SDB 13 SDB 0 SDB 3 SDB 6 /CS1 submodule 1 /CS2 submodule 1 UCMOS

9
10
11 12

-----

13
14 15

----K5 (submodule l)

--Ground

16
C

+ 5V

Table 3-5: Memory Submodule Connector

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

3.1 0.3

KeyboardIPrograrnmer Connector

The front panel o f the CP 526 has a 15-pin female connector f o r a programmer. In "Operator Control and Process Monitoring" mode, this serial interface is used to connect a process keyboard (see also Figure 3-3). Table 3-6 shows t h e pinout o f the female connector. The serial interface can only be operated in passive mode:

Passivemode The 20 mA loop current is supplied by t h e device connected.

Figure 3- 18 (serial interface, passive mode) is a schematic diagram o f t h e electrical connections o f an external device.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 1 7-0 1

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

GEXT (external ground)

TTY IN -(current output)

3
4

+24V

5
6
7

jumper for process keyboard TTY OUT

(current ~ n p u t )

TTY OUT - (current output)

GEXT (external ground)

8 9
10
11

TTY IN

+ (current lnput)

Ground for 24 V

20 mA power source of transmitter

Ground OV

12

4---

13
14

20 mA power source of recelver

15

Table 3-6: Serial Interface

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

The serial interface may either be operated actively or passively:

Active mode of operation The current loop o f 20 mA is taken from the power source o f the interface connection. Passive mode of operation The current loop i s supplied by the unit connected

Figures 3-17 (serial interface. active) and 3-18 (serial interface. passive) show the electrical connection of an external device for both modes of operation in a diagrammatic representation. ext. device

I I I I I
1

I I
I

24V I

ext. device

CP 526 Transmitter
l'

4
6

11

I I I 1
W

I I I
l'3
h

24V I

CP 526 Receiver
1.

1
I
1

1
9

1-0

Figure 3-17: Serial Interface, Active

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 1 7-0 1

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

8i
t
ext. device

I I
I

Transmitter

I I I I

I I I I

CP526

Receiver

Figure 3-18: Serial Interface, Passive

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-07

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

3.1 0.4

Video Output Connectors

[Link] Color Monitor

The four coaxial sockets on the front panel of the CP 526 are used to connect the CP 526 to a video monitor via a triaxial cable with treble shielding. The connectors carry the following signals: Red signal Green or green and sync signal Blue signal Synchronization signal
(R) (G) and (GIS) (B) (5)

The SYNCsignal, consisting of the horizontal (HSYNC) and the vertical (VSYNC) synchronization signals, can be combined with the green channel. The following signal voltage specifications are valid for the video signals:
R, G,B S

- level excursion of 0.7 V (75 ohms)

- level excursion of 1.0 V (75 ohms) - level excursion of 0.3 V SYNC portion and 0.7 V Green portion (75 ohms in each case) Output impedance: 75 ohms

G/S

CAUTION ! The coaxial sockets are not isolated!

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

[Link] Monochrome Monitor

In contrast to the color monitor, the monochrome monitor has only one connector for the BAS signal.

Level excursion:

0.3 V SYNC portion 0.7 V picture portion (75 ohms in each case) 75 ohms

Output impedance:

[Link] Monitor Connection

The C 526 generates horizontal and vertical synchronization (HSYNC, VSYNC) P pulses and a display enable (DISPEN) signal t o control the monitor. The DISPEN signal blanks out the screen t o obtain clear borders on the top, bottom, and sides. The timing of these signals, and other properties of the monitor control, are controlled through hardware registers. To obtain an optimal display on the monitor, you can change these settings through the CP parameter assignment function (see Planning Guide COM GRAPH). The starting point for the timing is the video control frequency (fc) or the time base (tc) = llfc, which corresponds t o the duration of one character in the horizontal direction. By setting a jumper, you can configure the CP 526 for highor low-resolution monitors. This changes the f c or t c as follows:

High resolution, where f c = 3.2727 MHz, and t c = 305.56 nsec. Low resolution, where fc = 1.6364 MHz, and t c = 61 1.12 nsec.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-U17-01

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

Register 0 (RO) specifies the frequency of the horizontal synchronization pulses and, consequently, the line frequency. Every monitor has a frequency range in which this frequency must be situated t o obtain a stationary picture. The following relation is valid between the HSY NC frequency (fh) and RO: f h = fcI(R0 + 1) or R0 = ( f c l fh) - l (integer) Register 1 (RI) determines the number of visible characters in a Iine. Register 2 (R2) sets the relative length of the HSYNC pulse in relation t o the beginning of a Iine. Increasing this value causes the visible image t o shift t o the left; decreasing it causes a shift t o the right. The following range is available:

Register 3 (R3) defines the length o f the HSYNC and VSYNC pulses. Here, the left hexadecimal number concerns VSYNC; the right hexadecimal number concerns HSYNC. The length of HSYNC isspecified in multiples of tc; the length of VSYNC is specified i n multiples of t h (th = llfh). Registers 4 and 5 (R4, R5) set the frequency of the vertical synchronization pulses and the frame frequency (fv). You must adhere t o the requirements of the particular monitor (50 or 60 Hz) t o get a stationary picture. R4 i s understood as a multiple of tzz (time duration of a character line); R5 is understood t o be a multiple of th. R4 acts as a coarse adjustment; R5 acts as a fine adjustment. Register 6 (R6) determines the number of visible lines i n the picture.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-0 1

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

Register 7 (R7) defines the relative length of the vertical synchronization pulse. The unit is the character line. Increasing this value causes the display t o move up on the monitor; decreasing i t causes a downward shift. Range: (R4

1) > R7 > R6

Register 8 (R8) defines the Iine jump procedure: R8 = 00: no line jump R8 = 01: line jump Register 9 (R9) determines the number o f raster lines per character Iine. R9 = raster lines per character line - 1 Low resolution: R9 = 8 (08 hexadecimal) High resolution: R9 = 17 (1 1 hexadecimal) Registers 10 and 11 (RIO, R11) set the shape of the cursor and the flashing rate. The number of the first raster Iine that is t o be unblanked should be entered i n RIO; the number of the last raster Iine that is t o be unblanked should be entered i n R1 1. (Character size = 8 X 18)

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

Cursor Cursor Cursor

Character line Character Ii ne Character line Character line Character line Character line Character line Character line Character line Character line Character line Character line Character line Character Ii ne Character line Character line Character line Character line

Register 10

Register 1 1

l Cursor I
Start (OEH)

l~ursor I End

BP 0 0: cursor visible 0 1 : cursor invisible 1 0: flashing, 1116 frame frequency 1 1 : flashing, 1/32 frame frequency

Figure 3-1 9: Monitor Register Parameter Assignment

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

Summary of Abbreviations fc: controller frequency (base frequency) tc: I/fc, character duration, horizontal fh: horizontal synchronization frequency (fh = fc / (R0 th: Ilfh, duration o f one raster line tzz: time required t o write one character line tzz = t h * (R9 + 1) fv: frame frequency (frequency o f the vertical synchronization pulses)

1))

Reg. # R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R1 1

Description Horizontal total' * Horizontal visible * Position HSY NC' Length VSY NUHSY NC * Vertical total' Vertical total (fine) Vertical visible * Position VSY NC' Line jump * Raster lines / char.' Cursor start / blinking Cursor end

Unit Character (tc) Character (tc) Character (tc) Raster line / character Character lines (tzz) Raster lines (th) Character lines (tzz) Character lines (tzz) Raster lines (th) Raster lines (th) Raster lines (th)

Maximum 255 (FF H) 255 (FF H) 255 (FF H) 15/15 127 (7F H) 31 (1 F H) 127 (7F H) 127 (7F H) 31 (1FH) 127 (7F H) 31 (1 F H)

* Value t o be written i n = calculated value - 1

Table 3-7: Overview of Registers

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C21 7-0 1

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

High Resolution 60 Hz R0 R1 R2 R3
R4 R5 R6 R7

High Resolution 50 Hz
68 H 50 H 58 H 65 H 21 H O H B 1A H 1DH 00 H 11 H 6E H 10 H

Low Resolution 60 Hz
69 H 50 H 58 H A7 H 1B H 05 H 1A H 1A H 00 H 08 H 67 H 09 H

Low Resolution 50 Hz
69 H 50 H 58 H A7 H 21 H 03 H 1A H 1DH 00 H 08 H 67 H 09 H

R 8 R9 R10 R1 1

69 H 50 H 58 H 65 H 1B H OA H 1A H 1A H 00 H 11 H 6E H 10 H

Table 3-8: Monitor Register Standard Assignment

Determining the Most Important Register Contents

If the standard settings for the registers do not produce a stable picture on the monitor, try t o redefine the register contents. To obtain a stable picture on the monitor, you should use the following algorithm:

Input quantities include the following:

- set by the hardware fc (controller frequency) R9 (raster lines per character line - 1)

- monitor requirements
fh-theoretical (line frequency) fv (picture change frequency)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-0 1

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

To improve the picture, set these quantities:

- RO, R4, R5

a)

fdfh-theoretical + auxiliary quantity h0 The controller frequency divided by the theoretical horizontal frequency. rounding o f f h0 + auxiliary quantity rO The auxiliary quantity rO i s obtained by rounding o f f hO. r0- 1 + R0 The auxiliary quantity rO decremented by 1 yields RO. f c / rO + f h (actual value) The actual value of the horizontal frequency is derived by dividing the controller frequency by the auxiliary quantity rO. fh/fv + h4 The auxiliary quantity h4 is derived by dividing the horizontal frequency by the frame frequency. rounding off h4 + n-th raster By rounding o f f h4, you can derive the auxiliary quantity n-th raster, which specifies the number of raster lines i n a picture. n-th raster DIV (R9 + 1) + r4 The abbreviation DIV symbolizes an integer division i n which numbers after the decimal point are truncated.
+ R4 r4 - 1 By reducing the auxiliary quantity r4, you can derive t h e value t o be entered for register 4.

b)

c)

d)

e)

f)

g)

h)

i)

n-th raster MOD (R9 + 1) + R5 The abbreviation MOD symbolizes a modulo operation (only t h e remainder o f t h e integer division is used).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

The following example shows how some of these formulas can be applied: fc = 1.6364 M H z R9 = 8 (low-resolution monitor)

l.G364 M H z I 15.625 k H z

rounding subtracting 1 1.6364MHzI 105 15.585 kHz / 50 H z rounding 312 DIV 9 subtracting 1 312 MOD 9

- 104.7296 - 105 - 104 (R0 = 68 hexadecimal) - 15.585 k H z - 31 1.7 - 312 - 34 - 33 (R4 = 2 1 hexadecimal) - 6 (R5 = 06 hexadecimal)

If the picture flickers, try t o use a neighboring number in step b or f. Perform the subsequent steps again.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 3

Connector Pin Assignments

Influence of the Registers on the Timing This section explains the relation between the registers and the horizontal and vertical timing.

(R0+ l)xtc
R I xtc

DISPEN

Blank~ng Screen actlve

HSYNC

R3xtc (R2 + l)xtc +----------------------------

t-

Figure 3-20: Horizontal Timing

The CP 526 software can write characters into the picture buffer memory only during the blanking time. The blanking time must last a t least 8 microseconds.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-0 17-07

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 3

Screen

Figure 3-21 : Vertical Timing Explanation o f Abbreviations The frame frequency (fv) is defined by t.4: f v = 11 t.4. R4 here acts as a coarse adjustment, while R5 acts as a fine adjustment. t.4 = (R4 + 1 ) * tzz + (R5 + 1) * t h t.6 = R * tzz - The number o f visible character lines i s stored i n R6. 6 t.7 = (R7 + 1) * tzz - The position o f the VSYNC pulse is specified by t.7.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

Process Visualization

3.1 1
3.1 1.1

Process Visualization
Types of Displays

The CP 526 allows you t o visualize a process i n graphics form. To d o this, the CP 526 contains a basic alphanumeric character set (which can be switched over t o country-specific variants) and another loadable symbol set that contains 128 characters. The COM diskette contains a standard character set for these 128 characters. In addition, COM GRAPH allows you t o generate new character sets o r change symbol sets by simple means. Depending o n the type of video monitor you are using, you receive a monochrome or a color display. On color monitors, you can specify the foreground and background color for each separate character. A n eight-color spectrum (black, white, red, cyan, blue, yellow, green, magenta) is available for this purpose. In addition, you can make the individual characters flash.

3.1 1.2

Screen Format

The screen has 24 lines and 80 columns, which means that each line of the screen can have u p t o 80 characters of text andlor graphics symbols. The display screen is divided into three areas: 22 lines for the actual process display
A message line (usually a t the t o p o f t h e display, but you can move i t or suppress it)
A command line (usually at t h e bottom o f the display, b u t you can move i t or suppress it)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-(217-01

Process Visualization

Chapter 3

The lower part of the display (outside the 24 lines) contains the function keys with the functions currently assigned to them. The figure below shows the standard format of the monitor screen.
r

Message line (~ndependent the screen d~splay) of

22 lines

Command line

16 function keys

Figure 3-22: Standard Format of the Monitor Screen

3.1 1.3

Display of Process Data

Data from the controlled process can be visualized in the process display. This data is in the programmable controller data blocks in all known SIMATIC S5 formats (see table 3-9). Process data is displayed in two different modes:
"DIGITAL" (as a number) "ANALOG" (as bars)

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

Process Visualization

Table 3-9 details t h e different CP 526 display modes.

Format in the Controller Screen Format Rangeofvalues

1)
F B
X

2)

3)

C d i d i
X X X X X

Floating-point number GPT 32 (32 bits)

-

Numericstring with max. of 12 places before decimal point (incl. sign) and max. of 10 places after decimal point (incl. decimal point) Numeric string with max. of 12 places including signs Horizontal or vertical bars

-[Link] to [Link]

Fixed-point number FPT 16 (16 bits)

-32 767 t o 32 767 Screen display -[Link] t o [Link] -999 t o 999 -9 999 999 t o 9 999 999 0 t o 255 0.0 1 t o 9990

x x x

X X X

Fixed-Point no. FPT 32 (32 bits) BCD number BCD 16 (16 bits) BCD number BCD 32 (32 bits) Byte (8 bits) Time TIMER (16 bits)

Numeric string with max. of 12 places including sign Numer~c string with max. of 12 places including sign Numeric string with max. of 12 places including sign Num. string with max. 12 plac. Field with four places (the decimal point is set automatically so that the time is given in seconds) Field with a maximum of 12 places

X
-~

X
-~

X
.

X X X
.

x x x

x x x

x x x

X - - - -

Count COUNTER (1 6 bits) Character string Binary ( l bit)

0 t o 999

X - - - -

[Link] with max. 80char. Individual ASCll character

ASCll [Link] 2OH t o 7E Oor l

- - -

X - - - -

1) Attribute F = Foreground color B = Background color C = Flashing onloff

2) Scaling 3) Offset d = Direct specification o f scalingloffset i = Indirect specification (DB address) o f scal i ngloffset

Table 3-9: CP 526 Output Format

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Process Visualization

Chapter 3

NOTE: The term "fixed-point number" describes a n integer w i t h a sign, b u t n o decimal places. W i t h COM GRAPH programming, however, you can specify decimal places for the formatted representation.
In the case o f a TIMER word, the time (0 t o 999) is i n BCD and transferred t o t h e data block (time base i n bits 13 and 14).
A SIMATIC floating-point number is represented w i t h a 24-bit mantissa. W i t h large values, inaccuracies o f up t o 0.6 * 10 -7 i n the representation occur relative t o the initial value.

Example: W i t h the number 999,999,872, the least significant bit o f t h e mantissa has the value 128, which means that there is no distinction i n the representation o f numbers within the range 999,999,872 + 64.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-0 1

Chapter 3

Operator-Process Communication

3.1 1.4

Display of Process Statuses

A process status can be, for example, a plant operating mode or the switching state of an actuator. The CP 526 can display such processes by the following means:

Color change of symbols or groups of symbols (line diagrams); for example, the display of a valve symbol i n green for open and in red for closed Exchange of symbols or symbol groups (e.g., the symbol open switch with the symbol closed switch) By flashing symbols, symbol groups, numbers, or lines. The update cycle can be set individually for each output field. Your specific application determines the best means t o implement these capabilities. If you are not sure of the best implementation, take your time and experiment a little with different update cycles. COM supports you and helps you to avoid programming errors.

3.1 2

Operator-Process Communication

During normal operation, the entering and monitoring of process data is performed via the process keyboard. This keyboard is especially tailored t o process control and has the following features:
IP 54 degree of protection Standard keyboard field Control key block Standard key block for numerical inputs Function key block Keylock switch

Operator-processcommunication is described below, with reference t o the keyboard shown in Figure 3-23.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Operator-Process Communication

Chapter 3

Figure 3-25: Cyri l l ic Process Keyboard (Section)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-V 17-01

Chapter 3

Operator-Process Communication

0
1 2

0
1

3
4

3
4 5

A B C D

A 6 3

5 6
7

E F

A
E X

6
7

G
H

8
9 A B C D E F produces

8
9 A B C D
F E

I
J K L

fi
K
M

JI

G
H i J K L M N 0 P R S T

F+
Q
R S T U

N H 0 0 P produces

H I J

K
L M N 0 P
R S T U

R P C T Y

X
B
b bI

W X Y

z 7. ,
l
4

U
Y

LLI
Tb

v
Y

v
Y

K)

Figure 3-26: Key Assignments for Cyrillic Keyboard

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-0 1

Operator-ProcessCommunication

Chapter 3

Figure 3-27: Key Layout o n t h e Small Process Keyboard

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27-07 7

Chapter 3

Operator-Process Communication

3.12.1

Command Line

The command line allows you t o enter commands t o control the process and invoke process displays. The command line has t w o parts: Input - left half of the command line. Enter the name of the appropriate command here. When you press the <CMD> key, the cursor is positioned in the input part of the command line from an arbitrary point i n the display. Then enter the name o f the command and press the < RETURN > key or the Enter key. Output - right half of the command line. The CP 526 displays error messagesl) here, e.g. when a command you have P entered i s unknown (operator error or a C fault). A typical user command is t o call up a new process display. There are other types of commands (such as entering values); however, these do not alter the current display on the screen (refer t o Planning Guide COM GRAPH).

1)

Note that the error texts must be stored in the 'lexicon' (refer t o Planning Guide COM GRAPH). If they are not, only error numbers will be displayed (e.g. W1 5). Explanations t o these error numbers can be found in the Chapter entitled "Error Messages" (Appendix A i n this Manual).

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27-0 1 1

Operator-ProcessCommunication

Chapter 3

3.12.2

Using the Function Keys

If you do not want t o have to type in a complete command each time you need it, you can program the command into one of the 16 function keys on the process keyboard. A labeling field at the bottom of the screen allows you t o program the function keys. You can program the function keys for each display output command, and you can redefine the key functions while the display is on the screen. Refer to Planning Guide COM GRAPH for more information on function keys.

3.12.3

Entering Process Data

You can also use the keyboard to enter data in the process. To do this, you must define data input fields at the programming stage. Enter data into these fields by positioning the cursor at the beginning of each field. To enter a value, select the correct input field by positioning the cursor into that field. To do this, use the following cursor control keys:

h cursor moves to the first input field of the screen

=$. cursor moves t o the next input field (used with the <RETURN

> key)

G cursor moves t o the preceding input field

cursor moves t o the first input field of the following line

cursor moves t o the first input field of the preceding line

Use the keyboard t o enter data in the input field. To make corrections within a data field, use the <CHAR LEFT> and <CHAR RIGHT> keys t o move the cursor one character position at a time.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

Operator-Process Communication

If you use one o f the five cursor keys i n the list above t o move t o another field, all characters t o t h e left of t h e cursor are checked for their validity. I f t h e results are positive, numerical values are shown right-justified i n the input field, and text is shown left-justified. The cursor is positioned at the beginning o f t h e selected field. I f the values are n o t allowed, you cannot leave the input field, and an operator error message appears i n t h e second part o f the command line.

You can leave t h e input field only i f you have entered a permissible value. To stop entering data i n t o a particular field, press the <BREAK> key or press the field selection key twice. If you press t h e field selection key, t h e input field is filled w i t h the permissible value from t h e previous procedure.
NOTE:
1.

Should you specify a conversion with offset and scaling when configuring input fields, as well as upper and lower limits for the input value, the CP 526 first converts the value entered and checks then whether the converted value i s within t h e specified limits. A nonpermissible value i s rejected by t h e CP 526, and the corresponding error message is displayed. For entries that are converted with offset and scaling (see Planning Guide COM GRAPH), a different value than the value originally entered may appear. W i t h right-justified output, t h e converted value is represented as i t would be when transferred t o the programmable controller. If you enter values for offset and scaling that are n o t particularly meaningful, and i f decimal places are suppressed, there may be considerable deviations.

2.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Operator-ProcessCommunication

Chapter 3

The following examples show how to convert and check a value for input and how t o reconvert it for right-justified output: Example A Input field in FPTl6 format Stored in the data block at DW10 Character positions 5.2 Scaling = 2.0 Offset = 1.0 Lower limit = 6 Upper limit = 16
1. Keyboard entry: 1 1.84 (1 1.84 - 1.O)/ 2.0 = 5.42 5 The value '5' is too small ! Error!

Conversion: FPT-16 value: Limit value check:

The value i s not accepted by the CP 526.

2. Keyboard entry: Conversion: FPT-16 value: Limit value check: Reconversion for output: Right-justified output:

15.05 (15.05 - 1.O)/ 2.0 = 7.025

OK (7 X 2.0) + 1.0 = 15.00 15.00

16.25 (16.25 - 1.O)/ 2.0 = 7.625 8 OK (8 X 2.0) + 1.0 = 17.00 17.00

3. Keyboard entry: Conversion: FPT16 value: Limit value check: Reconversion for output: Right-justified output:

SiemensAG C79000-88576-017-01

Chapter 3

Operator-ProcessCommunication

Example 8
Input field in FPT16 format . Character positions 4 0 Scaling = 0.87912 Offset = 0 Lower limit = 2000 Upper limit = 3000

1.

Keyboard entry: Conversion: Limit value check:

2999 (2999- 0 /0.87912 = 341 1.3659 ) The value '341l ' is too great! The value is not accepted by the CP 526. 2500 (2500- O /0.87912 = 2843.7528 ) 2844
OK

2 Keyboard entry: .
Conversion: FPT16 value: Limit value check: Reconversion for output: Right-justified output:

(2844X 0.87912) + 0 = 2500.21728 2500

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U7-0 1 1

Operator-Process Communication

Chapter 3

If the scaling value is located in the data block (indirect specification), it should not be equal t o zero. If it is, division by zero during the input check results i n error message WZO, and you can only exit the input field with the <BREAK> key. Also, you only need t o enter data i n the input fields that you want t o change. All other entries are transferred t o the process, with no further involvement on your part. When you have changed all the input fields t o the appropriate values, press the <TRANSFER> or <ENTER> key. This causes all entries t o be processed at the same time. The CP 526 automatically converts the entered values into the appropriate SIMATIC SS system formats when they are transferred t o the controller. (These formats are specified when programming with COM.) Table 3-1 0 lists the possible conversions.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Chapter 3

Operator-Process Communication

Format in the programmable controller Floating-point number GPT 32 (32 bits)

F

Screen Format

Range of Values

1)
F

2)

3)

4) i
X

B C d i d i d
X
X

Numericstring with max. of 12 places before decimal point(inc1. sign); max. of l 0 places after decimal point (incl. decimal point) Numericstring with max. o f 12 places including sign Horizontal or vertical bars

-[Link] to [Link]

X X

Fixed-point number FPT 16 (16 bits)

-32 767 t o 32 767 Screen display -[Link] t o [Link] -999 t o 999 -9 999 999 t o 9 999 999 0 t o 255 0.0 1 t o 9990

x x x x x x x
X X
X X

Fixed-point no. FPT (32 bits) BCD number BCD 16 (16 bits) BCD number BCD 32 (32 bits) Byte (8 bits) Time TIMER (1 6 bits)

Numericstring with max. of 12 places including sign Numeric string with max. of 12 places including sign Numericstring with max. of 12 places including sign Num. string with max. of 12 places Field with four places (the decimal point is set automatically so that the time is given in seconds) Field with a maximum of 12 places [Link] max. 80char. Individual ASCll character

X X

x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x

X - - - -

Count COUNTER (1 6 bits) Characterstring Binary ( l bit)

0 t o 999

X - - - -

ASCll [Link] 2OH t o 7EH Oor l

- - -

) ( X - - - - - -

1) Attribute F = Foreground color B = Background color C = Flashing onloff

2) Scaling 3) Offset 4) Limits d = Direct specification of scal ingloffset i = Indirect specification (Data Block address) of scalingfoffset

Table 3-10: CP 526 Input Formats

SiemensAG C79000-88576-C217-0 1

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

3.13
3.1 3.1

CP 526 Character Set

Overview of the CP 526 Character Set

Varoi us national charater sets can be loaded into the CP 526. Even the cyrillic character set can be loaded. In this case, Latin lowercase letters are replaced by CyriIlic uppercase letters. Table 3-1 1 shows an overview of the standard character set of the C 526. P Table 3- 12 shows an overview of the national character set coding. Please note, that the same character may have t o be given a different code i n every language it occurs.

Siemens AG 09000-68576-C217-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

0 0

0 1 1 1 1

1 0 0 1 1 0

0
0 0 1

served for 0 4 4 C P 5261 5 5 spe1

3
4

C
D

S
T

c
d

s
t

% & ~

U V ~

u ~

0 1 0

6 char7 7 a c tersl 8 8 sym-

6 ~ F

f ~v

'
(

7
8

G
H

W
X

g
h

w
x

1 0 0 1 9 9 b o l s 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 A 1 0 1 o 0 1 B 1 1 o 1 c 1 2

1
J K
L

y
Z j

y
z

*
+
,

..
;
<

k 1 m n

D 1 3

. l

=
>

M
N

1 0 E 1 4 1 1 F 1 5

?0 - O D E L

Table 3-1 1: Standard Character Set of the CP 526

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

Inter. ASCll National Standard Char. Set C

0

e
X.

C
0

A S C I l

S w e

D
a n i
S

G
e r m a n

B r
I

d.
1
F
I

t
I

S P a n
I

F r e n
C

n n.

h 1 N

h /
B e I.

n t e r n a t
I

L
I

o r.

o
n a I

I.

n e

2 2 4 5 5 5 5 6 7 7 7 7

3 4 0 1 1 1 14 0 1 1 1 14 1

2 2 4 1 2 3
SE

3 4 0 5 5 5

# $ @ B C [ \ D 0 e a c D

9 #
E

# #

# $

# $

# #

g
A 0 U " 0

@
[
\ ]

@
i
N

A 0 ] U e a e I }
U

'
$

L
\

s
A

]
.

, .

6 7 2 3 7E

B 7 7

a 0 d

{
0 u

'
0 }

e
I e }

{
I

ii

Table 3-12: Special National Characters o f the CP 526

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

3.1 3 2 .

Character Set for High-Resolution Monitor (Pixel Representation)

3.1 3.2.1 Standard Characters

20H = 32 21H = 33 22H = 34 23H = 35

Standard Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

Standard Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-07

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

40 H = 64

41H = 65

42H = 66

43H = 67

Standard Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-Q17-0 1

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

L""'"

Standard Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

60H = 96

61H = 97

Standard Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 7-01 1

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

L " " ' "

Standard Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U1 7-0 1

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

3.1 3.2.2 Special National Characters

I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Special National Characters C 526: 18 * 8 P

Siemens A G C79000-88576-0 17-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

Special National Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-138576-C27 7-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

3.1 3.2.3 Cyrillic Characters

Cyrillic Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-G? 77-07

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

Cyrillic Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

3- 128

Siemens A G C79000-B8576-CZ77-07

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

Cyril lic Characters CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-07

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

[Link] Symbols That Can Be Loaded

80H =l28 81H =l29 82H =l30 83H = l 3 1

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens A G C79000-88576-C27-07 7

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

90H =l44

91H =l45

92H =l46

93H =l47

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27 7-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

AOH =l60

A1 H =l61

A8H =l68

A9H =l69

AAH =l70

ABH =l71

ACH =l72

ADH =l73

AEH =l74

AFH =l75

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

BOH =l76

B1H =l77

B8H =l84

B9H =l85

BAH =l86

BBH =l87

BCH =l88

BDH =l89

BEH =l90

BFH =l91

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-07 7-01

C 526 CharacterSet P

Chapter 3

COH =l92

CIH =l93

C2H =l94

C3H =l95

C8H =200

C9H =201

CAH =202

CBH =203

CCH =204

CDH =205

CEH =206

CFH =207

Syrn bols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

DOH =208

D8H =216

D9H =217

DAH =218

DBH =219

DCH =220

DDH =221

DEH =222

DFH =223

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 18" 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

EOH =224

E1H =225

E2H =226

E3H =227

EAH =234

EBH =235

ECH =236

EDH =237

EEH =238

EFH =239

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C277-07

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

FOH =240

FAH =250

FBH =251

FCH =252

FDH =253

FEH =254

FFH =255

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 18 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-68576-Q17-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

3.1 3.3

Character Set for Low Resolution Monitor (Pixel Representation)

3.1 3.3.1 Standard Characters

Standard Characters CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-0 1

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

38H = 56

39H = 57

3AH = 58

3BH = 59

Standard Characters CP 526: 9 * 8

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-U17-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

50H = 80

51H = 81

52H = 82

53H = 83

Standard Characters CP 526: 9 * 8

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

68H =l04

69H =l05

6AH =l06

6BH =l07

Standard Characters CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-58576-C2 17-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

[Link] Special National Characters

Special National Characters C 526: 9 * 8 P

3- 142

Siemens AG C79000-68576-U 7-01 7

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

Special National Characters CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens A G C79000-88576-C27-07 7

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

3.1 3.3.3 Cyrillic Characters

60H 61H

62H

Cyrillic Characters CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-0 7

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

Cyrillic Characters CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-07

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

[Link] Symbols That Can Be Loaded

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

AOH =l60

A1H =l61

A2H =l62

A3H =l63

A8H =l68

A9H =l69

AAH =l70

ABH =l71

ACH =l72

ADH =l73

AEH =l74

AFH =l75

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens A G C79000-88576-C27-0 7 7

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

BOH =l76

B1H =l77

B2H =l78

B3H =l79

B8H =l84

B9H =l85

BAH =l86

BBH =l87

BCH =l88

BDH =l89

BEH =l90

BFH =l91

COH =l92

C1H =l93

C2H =l94

C3H =l95

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

C8H =200

C9H =201

CAH =202

CBH =203

CCH =204

CDH =205

CEH =206

CFH =207

DOH =208

D1H =209

D2H =210

D3H =211

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

CP 526 Character Set

Chapter 3

EOH =224

E1H =225

E2H =226

E3H =227

EAH =234

EBH

ECH =236

EDH =237

EEH =238

EFH

FOH =240
I , . . , , , . ,

F1H =241 .......

F2H =242

F3H =243

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Chapter 3

CP 526 Character Set

F8H =248

F9H =249

FAH =250

FBH =251

FCH =252

FDH =253

FEH =254

FFH =255

Symbols That Can Be Loaded CP 526: 9 * 8

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-0l

Contents
Communications Processor CP 526 Contents

Introduction

Ordering Data Technical Description of the CP 526 Module

Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board

Example of an Application Program for the CP 526

System Restrictions

Appendix
A CP 526 Error Messages
C79()0()-B857(j-C217-01

B Reference Literature

10

Chapter 4

Contents

Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board

4.1

.....

4-3
4-3 4-3 4-5

Application

..................................................

4.2
4.3 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3

Mechanical Construction Memory Submodules

......................................

........................................

Technical Specifications ....................................... 4-5 Operating and Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 . . Mechanical and Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. . . . . . 4-6 Logic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Installation Guidelines ........................................ Module Slots i n the Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting and Removing the CP 526 Expansion Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the CP Expansion Board t o the Basic Board . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Settings Startup
4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-10 4-11 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-14

.............................................

.....................................................

Connector Pin Assignments ................................... Backplane Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Submodule Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Board Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Visualization with t h e CP Expansion Board ............. Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface t o the Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating without Displaying the Old Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating While Displaying t h e Old Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Initiated by the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Checks o f the CP 526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Measured Values On the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Time and Visualization Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-0 1

4- 1

Contents

Chapter 4

4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4

Bar Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Displaying Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 . PixelGraphicsTexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 .

Appendix: Structure of the Data Block for Curve Measured Values

.......

4-35

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-017-01

Chapter 4

Application

Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board

4.1

Application

You can use the C 526 expansion board with the 115 U1135 U1150 U1155 U P programmable controllers. The CP expansion board supplements the video terminal interface of the C 526 basic board . P The expansion board may only be operated in combination with the ventilated basic board (color version). The expansion board displays measured data in the form of curves or bar charts. It also displays various text sizes and changes color when limit values are exceeded.

4.2

Mechanical Construction

The CP expansion board isa printed circuit board of double-height Eurocard format, which makes it compatible with the 902 modular packaging system. The width of the front panel i s approximately 20 mm. The expansion board has an 8-pin backplane connector of range 2, through which the supply voltage is applied. A 64-pin ribbon cable with a plug connects it t o the CP 526 basic board. The CP expansion board must be attached t o the CP 526 basic board t o form one mechanical unit (see 'installation Guidelines'). There is a rectangular receptacle on the front panel of the C expansion board for P the memory submodule (EPROM or RAM) containing the application program (see Figure 4-3). Figure 4.1 was deleted.

Mechanical Construction

Chapter 4

.. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. ............................ .. .. .. ..

..

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. . -. . . . -. . . .

Backplane Connector

.. .. .. : : i Figure 4-2: EPROM assembly . .......... . ........................................................... ; .. .. .. (plug-in p.c.b.11.

.. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. ..
. .

Expansion Plug

reduced scale)

Submodule Receptacle

Figure 4-3: Front Panel (reduced scale)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-07

Chapter 4

Memory Submodules

4.3

Memory Su bmodules

The memory submodules of the CP expansion board contain all of the application programs needed to display graphics, and the associated internal memory management information. You can use either EPROM or RAM submodules. When it is plugged in, the RAM submodule is battery-backedthrough the backplane bus of the programmable controller. If either the RAM submodule or the CP 526 is unplugged, all application programs are lost.

4.4
4.4.1

Technical Specifications
Operating and Environmental Conditions
IP 00

Degree of protection to DIN 40050lIEC 144 Permissible environmental temperature

- operating (operation possible only with

forced ventilation)

- nonoperating
Humidity class to DIN 40050 Operating altitude Code F, noncondensing Up to l500 m above sea-level

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Specifications

Chapter4

4.4.2

Mechanical and Electrical Specifications 0.35 kg Double-height Eurocard (160 mm X 233.4 mm) 20.32 mm

Weight (without memory module) Printed circuit board format

Front panel width Backplane connector Ribbon cable with plug for connection to the basic board Supply voltage Current consumption

ES 902, range 2, &pin

64-pin connector

+ 5 V, tolerance 5%
2.3 A

4.4.3

Logic Data
HD63484 from Hitachi

Graphics processor Memory configuration

- display refresh memory - RAM - operating system EPROM - memory submodule

3 color levels, 16 kwords each 8 kbyte 32 kbyte 128 kbyte (maximum) for EB 6ES5526-3LA21 256 kbyte (maximum) for EB 6ES5526-3LA22

Color CRT Control

- principle - display refresh frequency

- resolution
- colors

- line frequency

Pixel graphics 60 Hz 30.84 kHz 640 X 396 Black, red, green, blue, yellow, cyan, magenta, white

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-07

Chapter 4

lnstallation Guidelines

4.5
4.5.1

Installation Guidelines
Module Slots in the Programmable Controller
Slot-in module Slot No.

SubracWController PLC 55-1 15U

C 700-2 R

ER 701-3 C 700-3 R

Basic module l) Basic module 02) Bas~c module 3) Expans~on board 4,

0,[Link],5 0,1,2,3,4.5,6 Oa,Ob, la, lb, 2a. 2b,3,4,5 Ob, 1b, 2b

PLC 55-135U
ZG 135U EG 185 U Basic module 7, Bas~c module7)
11,19,27,35,43,51,59,67,

19,27,35,43,51,59,67,75,83,
91,99,107,115,123,131,139

PLC SS-150U
ZG 150 U EG 185 U Bas~c module 7, Basic module7) 3 S), 1 1 5), 19 5), 107, 115, 123, 131,1396),1476)

19,27,35,43,51,59,67,75,83, 91,99,107,115,123,131,139

PLC ss-155U
ZG155U Basic module7) 19,35,43,51,59,75, 83,91,99,107,115,123,131 139 G), 147 6)
1)

2)

3
4)

5)

6)

7)

Adapter casing i s required! One module per casing. Not with Interface Module 31 1 ! In versions with natural ventilation, 1 module per slot only. Only together with basic module in 1 casing. Only in conjunction with jumpering module 756. Only possible after changing jumpers on the bus PCB. The expansion board i s inserted into the next highest slot.

Table 4-1 : Module Slots of the Expansion Board

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Installation Guidelines

Chapter 4

4.5.2

Inserting and Removing the CP 526 Expansion Board

CAUTION ! Be sure that the power is off before inserting or removing the C 526. Never P insert or remove the C 526 with the power on. P

4.5.3

Connecting the C Expansion Board t o the Basic Board P

To use the CP 526 expansion board, you must connect it electrically and mechanically to the CP S26 basic board. Before doing this, make sure that all the points described in section 3.9 (Startup) have been checked and that the basic board i s fully functional. Then proceed as follows:
1. Unplug the monitor cables from the C S26 basic board and remove the basic P board from the controller rack.

2.

Check the pins of the 64-pin plug connector on the basic board, making sure that none are bent.

3. On the CP S26 basic board, loosen the t w o bolts of backplane connector X1 and the outer bolt of backplane connector X2 and remove the nuts.
4. With the screws that you loosened in step 4, fasten the two enclosed threaded spacer pins No. 1 on backplane connector X1 and the spacer pin No. 2 on backplane connector X2 (see Figure 4.4). The spacer pins must be attached on the component side of the board as shown in Figure 4-4.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Chapter 4

Installation Guidelines

Figure 4-4: Assembly Directions

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

4-9

Jumper Settings

Chapter 4

5.

Plug the 64-pin ribbon connector of the expansion board into the 64-pin plug connector of the basic board a shown in Figure 4-4. Check the plug s connection to be sure that every pin is inserted correctly. Place the two boards together, a shown in Figure 4-4. PIug the expansion s board spacer pins into the basic board spacer pin holes.

6.
.

4.6

Jumper Settings

All jumpers are set at the factory and should not be changed.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 4

47 .

Startup

To start up the CP expansion board, follow these steps:

1.

Mount the CP expansion board as described in section 4.5 (Installation Guidelines).

2. Check the expansion board jumper settings.

3. Make sure that the expansion board i s properly equipped with the EPROM operating system. The EPROM firmware (No. 579200-B1004-A901) is located
at J4 on the expansion board. 4. Switch off the power supply of your controller rack, and insert the connected boards (expansion board and basic board) into the specified slot.
5.

Insert a RAM su bmodule into the receptacle on the expansion board. The RAM memory submodule of the basic board must remain plugged in. Check the position of the front panel switch of the basic board. The switch must be in the "RUN" position to exchange data with the controller.

6.

7 Reconnect the process keyboard and turn the keylock switch to the "ON" .
position.
8.

Reconnect the monitor.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Startup

Chapter 4

9. Turn on the power supply. The CP reports with the START screen form. Type "START" on the process keyboard and press the <RETURN > key. The CP 526 displays the same form again. The current system data i s displayed between the message Iine (top Iine) and the command Iine (bottom Iine).
A red or green LED lights up on the front panel of the basic board, depending on the position of the switch. If this does not happen, recheck the above settings.

10. Once startup is complete, you can begin normal operator-process communication and visualization, or, using the programmer, you can generate new commands.

Chapter 4

Connector Pin Assignments

4.8

Connector Pin Assignments

The following subsections specify the electrical interfaces of the CP expansion board (shown in Figure 4-2).

4.8.1

Backplane Connector

The expansion board is connected to the backplane bus of the controller by an 8-pin, range 2 backplane connector. This connector is used exclusively for the power supply to the expansion board:

+ 5 V through pin 22
0 V through pins b2 and b32

4.8.2

Memory Submodule Connector

The expansion board has a 64-pin female connector to attach it to the memory submodule. The pinout of this connector is shown in Table 4-2.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-V 7-0 1 1

Connector Pin Assignments

Chapter 4

14 15
16

/CS2 Submodule 1 UCMOS

----

/STBY; /CS4
-----K5

+ 5V

Ground

Subrnodulel

Table 4-2: Memory Submodule Connector

4.8.3

Expansion Board Connector

A 64-pin ribbon cable with connector establishes the connection between the expansion board and the basic board. The pinout of this connector is shown in Table 4-3.
4- 14

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-0 1

Chapter 4

Connector Pin Assignments

1 3 5 7 9

AD AD AD AD AD

3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

AD AD AD AD A D

0
2 4 6 8

11 13 15 17 19

AD 11 AD 13 /CS 4 Submod.2 /CS 3 Submod.2 /CS 2 Su bmod.2 /CS 1 Submod.2 /W R /RD ERDY /PCS 5
RGB CLKPIX GREEN LOAD SR Ground

12 14 16 18 20
22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

AD 10 AD12 AD 14 AD 15 INT2 K5 Submod. 2 ISEL-EPROM JVSYNC Ground + 5V Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground + 5V + 5V RESET DB6 DB4 DB2 DBO IDT-R VBATT Ground

21 23 25 27 29

31 33 35 37 39
41 43 45 47 49 51

+5v BLUE RED + 5v /DSI

DB7 DB5 DB3 DB 1 AD 16 /ERAM Ground

53
55 57 59

52 54 56 58 60
62 64

61 63

Table 4-3: Expansion Board Connector

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

4.9

Process Visualization with the CP Expansion Board

The CP expansion board enhances the capability of the CP 526 basic board by allowing you to display and observe the following: curves, asafunctionoftime bars, with limit-dependent color change digital measured values in magnified form The CP 526-E must be used with a high-resolution monitor. The pixel graphics capability is only meaningful with a high-resolution monitor. The display output of the expansion board (pixel graphics) is combined with the display output of the basic board (character graphics). The display of the expansion board has a resolution of 80 characters by 22 lines. It assumes that the standard CP parameters (character size, 8 X 18 pixels) are used. The expansion board display (Iines 2-23) is four Iines smaller than that of the basic board. The first line of the CP 526 i s the standard message line. It can be suppressed, but not used for pixel graphic representation. The last three lines are for function key labels and the command line.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-0 1

Chapter 4

Process Visualization w i t h CP-E

Message line

PIXEL GRAPHICS SCREEN

22 l~nes

v
Command line

F1 F16
'Figure 4-5: Standard Organization of the Screen (not to scale) Instructionsto the expansion board do not always result in a pixel graphics display. Except for the Iabeling of the axes, curve windows always contain a character graphics display. The current symbol set is used to construct the display. The CP expansion board writes the characters for the axes into the character generator during initialization. This area also contains the seven characters of the upper half of the symbol set. If you are not using pixel graphics functions, these symbols can be freely defined with COM.
CAUTION ! If you are using the CP 526 expansion board, you should not change the upper seven characters of the upper half of the symbol set (F9H to FFH), because they are assigned the characters required for representing the curve axes.

The axes and their labels for curve windows and pixel graphics bars are white. You can select the background color from the CP parameters. An exception t o this rule is the heading for curve windows, which is always displayed in black on a white background.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-G?7 7-01

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

4.9.1

Curves

The expansion board allows you to define curve windows within a display. A curve window can contain up t o six curves. Each curve window displays a set of coordinate axes w i t h definable labels. The following are examples of possible labels: Header text w i t h a maximum of 24 characters (only 20 characters for the smallest window) Curvetext,inthedefinedcurvecolorfortheindividualcurve(thenumberof possible texts depends o n the window size). If t h e number o f curves i n a curve window exceeds the number o f possible texts, only t h e first curve texts are displayed. Text o n the time axis w i t h a maximum o f three characters Axis labeling o n the horizontal time- and the vertical y-axis, w i t h a maximum o f four digits per displayed value (with negative values only three digits are possible, e. g. labeling o f the time axis in the range -999 t o 0, and labeling o f the y-axis in t h e range -999 t o 9999) Coordinate axes can be displayed w i t h a grid network, so that the measured values can be read o f f quickly and reliably
A detailed description o f curve windows is given i n the Application Example (Chapter 5 i n this Manual).

The expansion board updates all curves i n a window a t cyclic intervals. During updating, the CP 526 fetches the data block (DB) t h a t has been prepared by the controller. The measured values displayed u p t o t h a t time are shifted t o the l e f t by the CP 526, and the most recent values are added t o t h e curves. Displayed measured values that extend beyond the l e f t edge o f the window are n o t stored by the CP 526.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 7-0 7 7

Chapter 4

Process Visualization with CP-E

4.9.1 .l Interface t o the Programmable Controller

The C 526 does not store old curve values. You can only observe the measured P values displayed i n the form of curves as long as the curve window appears on the screen. To display old values while you are constructing a new display, make sure that the controller program saves the required valuesand then makes them available t o the C 526 at the right time. P All measured values (both current and old) are in a data block (DB). The DB contains data words (DWs) and has the same structure for each curve window. The DB has the following structure: DWO DW1-DW6

- check word (number of curve and number of old values)

- current curve values in fixed-point format, 16 bits.

The following data words are needed i f old values are t o be displayed. To store values in this data block, use function block FB10:CURVE (see Application Example, Chapter 5). DW7 DW8 DW9

- reserved
- counters managed by F 10: CURVE. These are used by the B C 526 for time checking P - used by FB1O:CURVE

Old values arestored beginning at DW10. A DB with a maximum length of 256 words can be transferred t o the C 526 with expansion board. This limits the P number of values that can be stored. If there are six curves, a maximum of 40 old data points per curve i s possible in 16- bit, fixed-point format. If only the first curve exists, the number i s increased t o 240. If only the sixth curve exists, the ranges o f old values for curves 1 through 5 will s t i l l exist, but there will be only 40 old values.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C21 7-07

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

A detailed specification of this data block is given in the Appendix.

When displaying curves, the CP 526 allows three types of updating: Updating without displaying old values Updating while displaying old values Updating initiated by the controller

[Link]

Updating without Displaying the Old Value

If you do not need t o display old values, the CP 526 only requires the first seven data words (DWO - DW6) from the controller. This is an easy way of ensuring that

the required values are stored in the appropriate DWs. The right-hand byte of DWO (DRO) contains the number of old values and must be set t o zero; the lefthand byte of the DWO (DLO) contains the number (in binary) of curves.

Bit

15 14 0

13

12

11

10

DLO 0

Curve 6 Curve 5 Curve 4 Curve 3 Curve 2

Curve 1

To display, for example, only one curve, use two data words as follows:
DWO: KM 00000001 00000000 DW1:KFlOO - first curve exists with no old values - measured value to be displayed = 100

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Chapter 4

Process Visualization with CP-E

Note that the b i t position in the DLO above corresponds t o the DW number o f the displayed measured value as follows: DWO: KM 00 100000 00000000 DWItoDW5 DW6: KF 200

- sixth curve exists with no old values - not evaluated by the CP 526 - measured value t o be displayed = 200

A value is displayed only i f the curve w i t h this number has also been defined w i t h COM.

[Link]

Updating While Displaying the Old Value

The C S26 with expansion board displays the old values collected by the P programmable controller once while the display is being constructed. The C 526 P needs the entire data block (DWO - DW255) that holds the old values. As soon as the old values are displayed, the C S26 starts t o update. Once updating begins, P the C 526 requests the current curve values and any required supplementary P information (DWO - DW9) from the controller. The DB must be structured as specified in the Appendix. When updating old values, use function block FB1O:CURVE. As an input, FB1O:CURVE receives the current values (in DB: DW1- DW6), stores the old values i n the specified format, and maintains the counters required by the C 526. This function block is P described in detail in the Application Example (Chapter 5).

Siemens AG 09000-B8576-C2 17-01

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

Example In DB 1 1 l, most recent measured values are i n DWI-DW6. The function block the stores these values every second. It stores every tenth measured value as old information. The area containing the old values is filled after 400 seconds. After that, the oldest values are overwritten by the more recent values.
:JU FBI0 :CURVE : DB111 : KM0000000000111111 : KF+40 : KY111,1 : KY111,2 : KY111,3 : KY111,4 : KY111,5 : KY111,6 : KT100,l : KF+10 : T10

NAME DB N AZ W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 TA F TI

TRANSFER DB ALL SIX CURVES EXIST 40 OLD VALUES MEASURED VALUES ARE IN DB111

ENTER EVERY SECOND EVERY 1OTH VALUE IS OLD VALUE TIMER 10 IS USED

The example above describes a curve window configured with COM. DB 1 11 begins at DWO and is specified as the transfer block. With curve windows using COM you can specify the values in the controller that you want t o be dis-played as curves.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Chapter 4

Process Visualization with CP-E

[Link]

Updating Initiated by the Controller

This is a special case and is not common in practice. COM allows you t o define a curve window and then specify the controller as the updating device. To do this, use the PIXELGRAPH. BACKGROUND-UPDfunction (see Application Example, Chapter 5). You must specify the display, the defined window number and the DB that contains the old values. Update the curve window using an interprocessor communication flag, or by calling the SEND-DIRECT data handling block (see subsection 3.3.3). If the controller initiates this job, the CP 526 displays the collected old values in the curve window. Before starting, set the D containing the old values t o i t s full length (0to 255). B Of course, this is only meaningful if the relevant display with the curve window is onscreen. This type of updating i s used when an updating rate of one second is not fast enough for visualizing fast processes. These rapid events are sent to the controller and stored as old values. The old values are then collected for display by the CP 526. You can observe rapid processes, at least at random points, using this method. The DB that contains the old values has the same structure as the curve described in section [Link], and can be processed with FBI 0:CURVE (see Application Example). Only the right-hand byte of DW7 (DR7) is required additionally by the CP 526. This byte contains the number of pixels that should separate two measured values. In other types of updating, this value is determined from the ratio of the updating time t o the observation time. However, since this type of update is intended specially for fast processes, there is no point in working with update rates in the seconds range. The update time is therefore treated separately from the observation period and, instead, the numbers of pixels are transferred in the DB.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

Example: Defining a curve window with COM: Form: Pxlgra. disp.: Window: CURVE WINDOW DEMO 1 80 X 22 PLCupd. (time i n 100msec) P C 4 TIME UNIT: irrelevant

WINDOW SIZE: HEADER: UPDATE RATE: STEP SIZE of time axis:

Function F36.0 is then defined as PIXELGIUWH. BACKGROUND. UPD: (see Application Example) Form: PIXELGRAPH. BACKGROUND. UPD

Window 1 of the pixel graphics display DEMO The data are fetched by CPU No. 1 from DB 11 1. The DEMO function is defined as display output command with job number 10. Form : Name: DISPLAY OUTPUT COMMAND DEMO A-No.: 10

The PC program then updates the display automatically. SEND-DIRECT with A-No. = 10 (job number) invokes the defined curve window. To update the curve window every 2 seconds, the interprocessor communication flag is inverted every second. The flag therefore changes from 0 t o 1 every t w o seconds, i. e. the display is updated every 2 seconds with the collected old data.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 4

Process Visualization with CP-E

You must define flag byte FY36 as an interprocessor communication flag in DB1. :AN :L :SE :JC :JU :AN T10 KT100.0 T10 M001 M002 F36.0 F36.0 THE INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATION FLAG IS INVERTED EVERY SECOND

MOO 1 M002

-. -

THE INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATION FLAG IS INVERTED

and is updated every 100 msec. The most recent value is always i n DB 111, DW l,

NAME DB N

:JU FBlO :CURVE DB111 KMOOOOOOOO 0000000 1

ONLY THE FIRST CURVE IS SET UP

KF + 240 KY111,1 KY0,O KY0,O KY0,O KY0,O KY0,O KTO1O.O KF+I T11

240 OLD DATA ALREADY STORED IN DB111 THERE IS NO REMAINDER

EVERY 100 MSEC., EVERY VALUE CHANGES TO AN OLD VALUE TIMER 11 IS USED

The spacing, in pixels, between t w o measured values need t o be entered only once: DB111 THE SPACING IN PIXELS ( = 2) BETWEEN :C :L KF + 2 OLD VALUES IS IN DB111, DR7 :T DR7

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-01

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

In this example, you must be sure that the Iabeling o f the time axis agrees w i t h the actual time. The following relationships are valid and are prescribed by the controller program : Number of old values Spacing between t w o old values in pixels Updating time in the controller (dt)

- 240
- 2 - 100 msec.

The CP 526 specifies that there lie 80 pixels between the present time ( i.e., 0) and the step size of the time axis(i.e., T1). This is true regardless of the window size. To display all the old values, a curve window with 480 horizontal pixels (number of old values * spacing = 240 * 2) i s necessary. From the present t i me t o T1,40 measured values (number o f pixelslspacing = 8012) are entered. This corresponds t o a controller time of 4 sec. (dt * 40). To be sure that the labeling of the time axis is correct, you must specify a corresponding value for T1 in COM. With T1 = 4, a labeling unit of 1 sec. must be used. The time unit i s not taken into account w i t h this kind of updating.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 1 17-0

Chapter 4

Process Visualization with CP-E

[Link]

Time Checks of the CP 526

The curve display is t h e only application where past values are displayed. You must therefore make sure that the values over the time axis agree w i t h real time. Problems can occur if the values cannot be transferred from the controller with every updating o f t h e CP 526, or i f t h e C 526 cannot adhere t o t h e updating time P due t o the large amount of updating required. For this reason, t h e expansion board makes a time check during t h e updating o f t h e curves. The following are t w o examples: The controller carries old values and tests the counters i n the DB. The controller does n o t carry old values and tests on the internal CP 526 clock. If t h e controller carries old values, as specified above, the counters controlled by FB 1O:CURVE (DW8) are used for t i m e checking. The updating time configured w i t h COM is n o t applicable here. This time determines at w h a t t i m e intervals t h e CP 526 reads t h e DB w i t h the current curve values. The expansion board compares the current counter values w i t h those o f t h e previous update. It assumes that the measured values in the controller are updated in the time intervals t h a t were defined w i t h COM. If this is not the case, the curve update depends on t h e controller. If the measured values in the controller are updated faster than specified i n COM, the expansion board interpolates t h e measured data it could n o t read. When this happens, error message W40 appears o n t h e screen. I f the measured values are updated by the controller slower than specified, this update time is adhered to.
CAUTION ! If t h e update time that you specify in COM is not identical to the update time o f the measured values (call o f FBlO:CURVE), t h e time axis Iabeling n o longer agrees w i t h t h e real time.

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

If the controller i s not carrying any old values, the counters in the DB d o not exist, and you can only check f o r the internal CP clock. This check is made t o see whether the update time defined w i t h COM is strictly observed. If it is not, the controller interpolates t h e measured values, and error message W40 appears.

[Link]

Displaying the Measured Values On the Screen

You can define up t o six curves for one curve window. This section discusses t h e range of values o f the curves and the associated y-axis labeling. In the simplest case, all the measured values t o be displayed as a curve have t h e same range o f values, and this range o f values i s used t o label the y-axis. Beginning at t h e time axis, the defined infill pattern should appear below the curves. No limitvaluesaredefined inCOM. The form below allowsyou todefine three curves i n the range o f values 0 t o 400, and select the largest curve.

Form:

CURVE WINDOW

WINDOW SIZE: UPDATE RATE: STEP SIZE o f time axis: SMALLEST SCALE VALUE:

80 X 22 1 sec 80 TIME UNIT: 0 STEP SIZE o f y-axis:

sec 100

the GREATEST SCALE VALUE is calculated as follows: GREATEST SCALE VALUE = SMALLEST SCALE VALUE + Y X STEP SIZE o f y-axis where

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-0 1

Chapter 4

Process Visualization with CP-E

Y = 4 for window sizes 80 X 22 and 40 X 22,

i. e. GREATEST SCALE VALU E = 400
and y = 2forwindowsizes80x11,40x 11 and26x 11, i. e. GREATEST SCALE VALUE = 200 Form: CURVE The following holds good for all three curves: SMALLEST OUTPUT VALUE: GREATEST OUTPUT VALUE: 0 400

If you call this CURVE form t o the screen during operation, and the PC provides the OUTPUT VALUES as specified in COM (see subsection [Link]). The current values i n the DB are displayed in the curve window and you can simply read them off from the screen. If a curve value i s not in the defined range of values, the message W35 appears and reduces or increases this value t o the smallest or largest output value, respectively. If you want the measured values displayed on a different range during output, follow one of these procedures: Specify the desired y-axis labeling for the curve window. Specify the curve range values i n the controller. The C 526 handles the P display for you. The smallest output value of the curve is displayed at the lower window edge, and the largest output value i s displayed at the upper window edge. The C 526 P calculates the necessary values for length and offset. The following example illustrates this application: The measured values are i n the range o f values 0 t o 400 i n the controller, but the display has a temperature of -20 t o + 20" C. The desired filling pattern should lie beneath the curves, beginning at O0 C. Below - 1 0 and over + 10" C, the curve should be completely filled in. To display the following PROGRAM LIMITS form, press the <F2> function key from the CURVE WINDOW form.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-U 17-07

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

Form: CURVE WINDOW SMALLEST SCALE VALUE: Form: PROGRAM LlMITS

REF. VALUE: LOWER LIMIT: UPPER LIMIT:

-20

STEP SIZE o f y-axis:

10

0 -10 10

Form: CURVE The following holds good for all three curves: SMALLEST OUTPUT VALUE: GREATEST OUTPUT VALU E: 0 400

To define three curves i n the example, the following i s true: smallest output value: greatest output value: 0 400

If you call this CURVE form t o the screen during operation, the current values i n the DB are displayed.

Values from the programmable controller

4 ref. value

maximum as a function of smallest scale value, step size of y-axis and window size upper limit

smallest output loo . value of curve '-0

4 starting point o f y-axis

1
@

lower limit (-20 + 10)

step size of y-axis

Figure 4-6: Displaying the Measured Values on the Screen

4-30

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C27 7-01

Chapter 4

Process Visualization with CP-E

You can also define curves w i t h different value ranges, t o make up one curve window. The CP 526 automatically projects t h e range o f values i n the curve window. The y-axis labeling depends o n the ordinate values t h a t you specified for the curve window. If you want an extra label on the y-axis, you can enter t h e Iabeling yourself w i t h a n appropriate background display.

[Link]

Updating Time and Visualization Period

When defining curve windows w i t h COM, you can select the update time and t h e visualization period. This section provides information on defining the curve window most suitable for your curve display. The visualization period is not specified directly, b u t i s calculated from the window size, the step size on the t i m e axis, and the time unit. Visualization period = X * stepsize, i n time units, where:

The following are examples: Window Size 80 X 22 8 0 x 11 40 X 22 40x 11 26x 11 Step Size 1 80 1 100 120 Time Unit min. sec. hr. sec. sec. Visualization Period 6 min. 480 sec. 3 hr. 300 sec. 240 sec.

Siemens AG C79000-58576-C21 7-01

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

The visualization period is not important in these situations. This applies t o all window sizes. What i s important is the interaction of the update time (dt) and the step size X time unit (T 1 in sec.). These specifications determine how many pixels (k) there are between two measured values. To obtain the desired display, you must configure the display so that 'k' lies between 1 and 4. 'k' does not need t o be an integer. For example, i f you plot a 'k' of 413, the CP 526 shifts the curves twice by one pixel, and once by t w o pixels. In general, the following formula holds:

Examples:

Configured with COM GRAPH Window size 80 X 22 80 X 22 8 0 x 11 4 0 x 11 80 X 22 40 X 22 26x11 8 0 x 11 40 X 22 80 X 22 80 X 22 80 X 22 26x 11 40 X 22 40x11 1 2 5 2 5 10 30 2 5 1 1 10 30 30 5 dt sec secs secs secs min secs secs secs secs min sec secs secs secs min 10 40 50 20 100 2 10 100 10 1 80 10 40 40 1 T1 secs secs secs secs min min min secs min hr secs min min min hr
Tmax

Result
k

60 240 300 60 600 6 20 600 30 6 480 60 80 120 3

secs secs secs secs min min min secs min hr secs min min min hr

8 4 8 8 4 6.67 4 1.6 0.67 1.33 1 1.33 1 1 6.67

Table4-4: Exampleof Defining Curve Windows

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-0 1 7-0 1

Chapter 4

Process Visualization with CP-E

4.9.2

Bar Display

The bar display with pixel graphics allows you t o define a color change that depends on a limit value. The position of the bar on the screen is defined by the values you enter in the ROW and COLUMN fields, and by the window size, and the type o f bar. If the type of bar is vertical, the maximum bar length is calculated as follows: window size * 4 characters If the type of bar is horizontal, the maximum bar length is calculated as follows: window size * 10 characters The largest output value is calculated as follows: smallest output value + window size * step size The pixel graphics bar is displayed on the screen as follows: Smallest output value is the position of the bar (row, column) Largest output value is the position of the bar + maximum bar length The other y-axis values (reference value, lower and upper limit) are also displayed. The bar is displayed, starting at the reference point. If you have not defined a reference point on the screen, the CP sets the reference value equal t o the smallest output value.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-V 17-01

Process Visualization with CP-E

Chapter 4

4.9.3

Displaying Values

Pixel graphics displays allow you t o magnify the values so that you can easily read them from a distance. The value display uses the character graphics symbol set. The characters have a resolution o f 8 X 18 pixels. During enlargement, individual pixels are magnified. This includes pixels that have not yet been set. (Keep this i n mind when positioning an image.) The position o f a character should always be i n the upper lefthand corner.

4.9.4

Pixel Graphics Texts

Pixel graphics text displays can be magnified i n four different directions.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C21 7-01

Chapter 4

Appendix

Appendix: Structure of the Data Block for Curve Measured Values This appendix lists the parameters for a data block containing measured values t o be displayed w i t h time curves. The contents o f the data block are shown on the next page, w i t h the explanation o f each parameter o n the following pages.

Bit Number Offset

+0
1

~ u r n b eo f curves nl Number of curves r Current value o f t h e first curve Current value o f t h e second curve Current value o f the third curve

NI

3
4

I
I
g Controlled b FB10:
C~RVE

Current value of the fourth curve Current value o f the fifth curve

6 1 Current value o f the sixth curve 7

8

Reserved Counter z Factor f

P P

Only i f P upda C
I

Update old valu address Reserved

9
10
P p

Old value o f curve 1

P

Old value o f curve 2 Old value o f curve 3 Old value o f curve 4 Old value o f curve 5 Old value o f curve 6

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Appendix

Chapter 4

Offset:

Relative starting address of the data within the data block. In the manual this offset has been assumed t o be zero. But this is not absolutely necessary. You can also set up the structure of the data block (DB) beginning at an arbitrary data word (DW) address. The addresses specified in the manual are relative t o the offset. This allows you t o keep the measured data for several curves within one data block. This is particularly useful if you are working without displaying the old values. Number o f curve plotsdisplayed in the window as a bit field. The contents o f data word 0 (DWO) are as follows: Bit 15: Bit 14: B i t 13: Bit 12: Bit 11: Bit 10: Bit 9: Bit 8: old values valid/ old values invalid old values format FPTI 6/BYTE curve plot 6 present /not present curve plot 5 present /not present curve plot 4 present /not present curve plot 3 present /not present curve plot 2 present /not present curve plot 1 present /not present

n:

N:

Number of old values per curve (N = 0 means that there are no old values).
A total o f 240 old values are possible with offset 0 and FPT16 format. N

determines the maximum number of old values that can be stored per curve. I t makes a difference whether a particular curve has been set up as curve 1 or as curve 6. The number of possible old values depends on the most significant curve bit set (bit 8 through bit 15 in DWO). Here, i t makes no difference whether curves with lower-order curve numbers have been selected. The old value number must have an even number o f digits.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U77-01

Chapter 4

Appendix

Example:

- I f only curve plot 1 exists, and the old values are i n FPT16 format, the
following applies:

- I f curve plot 6 exists, and the old values are i n FPT16 format, the
following applies:

Factor t h a t can be used t o extend the visualization period (at the cost o f resolution). f = 1 means that each measured value is also stored as an old value by the controller. Otherwise, each f-th measured value is acquired by the controller. When old values are displayed, therefore, the time between t w o displayed measured values is equal t o f * update time. Value range:
1 I f 5 15

Current counter value when acquiring old values. If it is incremented per measured value, and i f z = f, an old value is stored. Value range: 1 5 z If

address:

Relative address o f the most recently stored old value within the memory reserved for old values. The following is t h e range of values: Value range: 0 address 5 N-l

Current value o f t h e i-th curve plot: Must be in FPT16 format. These values must be kept current for t h e curves t h a t are set i n t h e DLO (number of curves n).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-01

Appendix

Chapter 4

Old values for curve i: The old values for curve i are stored here. Through the format bit in n, you can store the old values in byte format. This allows you t o store twice as many old values as with FPT16. With the valid bit in n, you can prevent old values from being output before the controller program has filled this buffer.
The old values are stored in a cyclic buffer. This means that the current value overwrites the oldest one. ADR refers t o the most recent old value. The range of old values for curve i, with FPT16, is N words long, and begins at the following DW address:

Example:
For curve 4 with 40 old values, the range of old values is DW170 to DW209.

Only if PC updating: See subsection [Link], (Updating Initiated by the Controller). For other applications, this byte has no significance.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-V 17-0 1

Contents
Communications Processor CP 526 Contents C79000-88576-C217

Introduction

Ordering Data Technical Description of the CP 526 Module Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board

Example of an Application Program for the CP 526

System Restrictions

Appendix
A CP 526 Error Messages ~ 7 9 0 0 0 - ~ 8 5 7 6 . ~ 2 7 7 - 0 1 B Reference Literature

10

Chapter 5

Contents

Example of an Application Program for the CP 526

5.1 5.2 5.3

Set-up Requirements Functional Description

......... ...............................................
..............................................
..................................

5-3
5-3 5-4 5-8

Assigning Parameters t o the CP 526

Generating Displays ............................................ 5-11 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ......................... 5-11 . Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 . . Stat~c Dlsplays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 . . Dynam~c Dlsplays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 How t o Generate 'DY N 1' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Value Input Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Value Output Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Baroutput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 Shapeoutput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53 Time Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Pixel Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 Description of the Pixel Graphics Display 'PXG1' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 Description of the Pixel Graphics Display 'PXGZ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 Bar Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79 Pixel Graphics Value Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86 Value Input Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89 Value Output Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 Time Input Command .............................................. 5-94 Set Bit and Reset Bit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94 Display Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97 Message Display Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
5.5

5.5.1

PLC Program for Application Example f o r the 55-135U w i t h CPU 928 ............................................... 5-114 STEP-5-Program w i t h Handling Block Parameterization for theS5-135U w i t h CPU 928 ...................................... 5-1 18

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Contents

Chapter S

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

Set-up Requirements

Example of an Application Program for the C 526 P

The following example shows you, step-by-step, how t o create a complete application program that runs on COM. Due t o space limitations, all programmable functions cannot be explained here. An overview o f all programming possibilities, detailed information on screen forms (permissible entries, limit values, etc.) and a description of error messages are given in the Planning Guide for the Configuration Software COM GRAPH. CP-526-specific error messages are explained i n Appendix A o f this Manual.

5.1

Set-up Requirements

To follow this example, you must set up the application program named "EXAMPLE". At least the standard symbol set with the appropriate resolution for your monitor (i.e.,SSl for high and SS2 for low resolution) must be present i n your program. Note that i n the example, SSH and SSN are renamed t o SS1 and 552, respectively, during transfer.
l

The lexicon data is not necessary, but helpful. It enables plain text messages, instead o f error numbers, t o be output while you are testing the program.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Functional Description

Chapter 5

5.2

Functional Description

This section describes how the finished application program should run on the CP. Since the application program functions overwrite the standard C 526 command START, P the following display appears immediately after a total program transfer (TRANSFER FD -> CP function) and after you have either plugged in the process keyboard or selected the COM PROCESS KEYBOARD EMULATION function.

f
..............................

MESSAGE LINE ............................

EXAMPLE FOR

COM GRAPH

TEMP TANK 1 COMMAND LINE

Fl
TANK

XXXC $$$$ MSG. PART O F COMMAND LINE $$

1
This display shows an example of a text output scaled up by means o f the C expansion P board ("EXAMPLE FOR COM GRAPH"). The message line is just below the upper border of the display. The command line is just above the lower border. The message line contains the latest message sent from the programmable controller. Thisdefinition is t o be made when assigning parameters t o the CPIOP. You can output all messages in the next display by either entering the command "MESSAGE DISPLAY," or by pressing the < F7 HELP> function key.

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Functional Description

The lower part of the display shows a scaled up variable value (in this case the temperature of tank 1). This kind of representation is useful especially in the case of critical actual values which have t o be recognized quickly by the operator. You reach the next display by pressing the <F1 TANK> function key. The display on the CP monitor shows a process with t w o tanks. Over each tank is a value input field in which you may preset the liquid level and a value output field that shows the actual liquid level. In addition, there are bars that show the liquid level in the tanks. To the right of the tanks, the tank temperatures are represented as a moving curve. Note that in the controller, a program must be running that supplies the data blocks used in the program EXAMPLE with process values. Also, the CP and the controller must be connected t o each other. You can operate the display without curves and measured values, when the controller i s not connected. In this case, the error message "problems on PC line !" appears in the command line.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 1 17-0

Functional Description

Chapter 5

.........................................................................
TANK1 10000 Liters 9000 Liters TANK2 8500 Liters 6000 L ~ t e r s CURVE 1 CURVE2

TankTemperatures 220

s:~*[Link]! +s-C:*+ss:wrs? sS:bS:YssS+*! S b*SssSS.*s! Y***kYs:Y**i YS1:4SSSY**? Y:**4XBsY*W b*.kb:*:*:Y:YC:y! .+b.+:bS.V:Y:b W! b [Link]:C:Y *.C:! ~C-b***S:kb+*! kb*sU:Y:y.*b*?

.*.v.*

. ... C..

v. ..

C..

:C'5X-*s**sss! S:~SS**SSS*! s:***S*SssS? s*:~s**s*sS! :YSS*[Link]! :r-*.bs:b*S.*s*~ :Y:YSsS*SS:YS~ :SSS***s*C:%+

.T.-.T.7...7.T.-.7.T.

120

20

"Cx
.....................................
F1 VENT1 C

22:59:30

F2
VENT1 0

F3 VENT2 C

F4
VENT20

F5
ENTER VALUE

F6
ENTER TIME

F7 MESSAGE

F8 EXIT

You can open and close the left valve on the display with the < F1 > and < F2> function keys. This also works without the controller. The color of the valve and the flashing attribute should change. A t the same time, the display attribute of the value output field above the left tank changes. The <F3> and c F4> function keys change the right valve and the display attribute of the value output field above the right tank. You can enter "VALUE = " into the command line with the

< F5>

function key.

You can enter a numerical liquid level for tank 1, and send this value t o the controller by pressing the < RETURN > key. The

< F8 EXIT>

function key brings you back t o the START display.

You can find the meanings of all function keys o n the process keyboard (e.g., <FIELD RIGHT>) i n the CP description (see subsection 3.12).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 1 7 7-0

Chapter 5

Functional Description

The < F7> function key in the tank display causes the message display t o be output. You can use the function keys to display messages (possibly divided into groups) and i f desired, t o acknowledge them. You can find specific instructions on operating the message display in the CP description (see subsection 3.3.6).

f
......................................................................... 00.00.00 22:59:30 TITLE FOR GROUP l

$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$Q$

ecuxt

44

Q Q+

Group I Group 2

Group3 Group4

Gr 1..4

End

To display the title as shown, press the < F6 GROUP 1 > function key. You can display messages only i f the controller sends messages t o the CP with the send direct command. These messages are also present in the application program.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Assigning Parameters t o the CP 526

Chapter 5

5.3

Assigning Parameters to the CP 526

Before you can begin programming, you need t o assign the C parameters. P You reach the ASSIGN CPIOP PARAM. form by pressing the < F 6 CONTINUE> and CF4ASSlGN CPIOP PAR> function keys in the PROGRAM USER DATA form.
It is not necessary t o fill i n the fields in the form t o get t o the C /OP PARAM. P ASSIGNMENT form. They are only needed when you program displays (e.g., segments).

NOTE: In all screen forms entries can be made directly or selected by means of the function key.

< F7 HELP>

->

PROGRAM SELECTION U S E R D A T A

->

SELECTION

->
DRIVE: $

................................................................................

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: $$$$$$$$

S T A T I C D I S P L A Y : ############ SYMBOL SET NAME:

##At###

DYNAMIC D I S P L A Y : ############ PIXELGRAPHIC D I S P L A Y : ###M#######

The symbol s e t ( S S ) need o n l y be s p e c i f i e d when f i r s t g e n e r a t i n g s t a t i c d i s p l a y s and segments o r when t h e SS i s t o b e changed. I f n o SS i s s p e c i f i e d when c h a n g i n g e x i s t i n g d i s p l a y s , t h e n t h e SS w i t h w h i c h t h e d i s p l a y was g e n e r a t e d w i l l be e n t e r e d and used.

F 1 SEGMENTS

F 2 STATIC DISPLAYS

F 3 DYNAMIC DISPLAYS

F 4 SYMBOLS

F 5 FUNCTIONS

F 6 CONTINUE

F 7 HELP

F 8
EXIT

F 1

F 2 LEXICON DATA

F 3 PXLGRA. DISPLAYS

F 4 ASSIGN CP/OP PAR

F 5

F 6
CONTINUE

F 7
HELP

F 8
EXIT

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-017-01

Chapter 5

Assigning Parameters t o the CP 526

Before you begin generating segments, decide on a background color for the entire program. Define the color i n the CP/OP PARAM. ASSIGNMENT form. You may also determine other central values here e.g., position and color of message and command lines, nationality of ASCII character set on the CP, parameters for connecting the monitor ) (monitor register) etc.. You can determine the exact meanings of the input fields in assigning CPIOP parameters ) i n the Planning Guide COM GRAPH (Chapter 4 . For the example, use the following parameter assignments:

-> SELECTION -> USER DATA -> C P / O P - P A R A M . A S S I G N M E N T

................................................................................
DRIVE: B B a c k g r : RED B a c k g r : BLUE F o r e g r : BLACK F o r e g r : CYAN Flashing: M Flashing: M ZERO:

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE Line: 01 L i n e : 24 ONE: 1 Char: Char:

Message l i n e : Command l i n e :

Delimiter: Time: Decimal p o i n t :

Date : B i n a r y Represent. : N a t i o n a l i t y : INTERNATIONAL

Screen : Backgr: BLUE F o r e g r : WHITE Flashing: M F c t . Keys: Backgr: WHITE F o r e g r : BLACK Flashing: M I f ' & ' i s s p e c i f i e d as c h a r a c t e r , a c e n t r a l i z e d p o i n t i s used. M o n i t o r r e s o l u t i o n : HIGH Send D i r e c t f o r messages: 199

S i g n a l i n case o f op. e r r o r : 2 R e c e i v e A l l f o r messages DB: 202

F 1 MONITOR REGISTER

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

STORE

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-07

Assigning Parameters t o the CP 526

Chapter 5

By pressing the <F1 MONITOR REGISTER> function key you reach the ASSIGN PARAMETERS form. Here you can enter the parameters necessary for the connection of your monitor. These parameters depend on the monitor used. A detailed description of the individual registers and how t o define them can be found in subsection 3.10.4. By pressing the < F8 EXIT> function key you return t o the previous parameter assignment form. You are now prompted t o save the parametersjust entered using C F6 STORE>. The C parameters in the program EXAMPLE are stored on drive B. P If you try t o exit the form by pressing the < F8 EXIT> function key before storing the CP parameters, COM responds DATA LOSS. .EXIT FORM?. If you press the < F1 YES > function key, you exit the form without saving any of the input values. If you press the <F3 NO> function key, you remain in the form.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

54 .
5.4.1

Generating Displays
Symbols

) You have already transferred the standard symbol set (i.e., SS1 or 552, depending on your monitor) t o the program EXAMPLE. To better understand symbol set generation, you will, in this subsection, redefine one character of this symbol set. In the SELECTION form (for information on entering this form, see 'Use of Libraries'), press the < F1 PROGRAM USER DATA> function key. In the next form, USER DATA, enter the name "SS1 " in the SYMBOL-SET NAME field. Do not fill in any other fields in this form. The < F 4 SYMBOLS> function key in the first part menu of this form brings you t o the SYMBOLS form. If the C 526 is on-line while you select static display generation, the C monitor responds P P by switching off the START display. The START display contains, besides product designation and version number, information on the system (e.g., capacity of the memory submodule used). The color of the screen, the color and position of the message and command lines, as well as the color of the function keys, now correspond t o the values preset i n the CP 526 PARAM. ASSIGNMENT form; the screen is completely blank, except for the row of function keys. Beginning with the SELECTION form, the drive and program name are displayed in the upper right-hand corner of most forms, under the solid line. This reminds you that all Save and Delete operations refer t o the specified program. The fields i n the SYMBOLS form, which comes up next, show the following default values:

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

-> SELECTION -> USER DATA S Y M B O L S

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

SYMBOL SET NAME FOR SYMBOL SELECTION: SYMBOL SET NAME TO BE STORED: MONITOR RESOLUTION:

SS1 SS2 HIGH

F 1

F 2

F 3 SYMBOL SELECTION

F 4

F 5

F 6 STORE SYMB. SET

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

The MONITOR RESOLUTION field is preset t o either HIGH or LOW, depending on t h e monitor, or on the entry i n the program-ID header. In the SYMBOL GENERATION form, t h e field for a symbol is either 18 X 8 pixels for HIGH resolution, or 9 X 8 pixels for LOW resolution (a pixel is one image element). The

< F3 SYMBOL SELECTION > function key brings you t o t h e SYMBOL SELECTION form

To understand the inputs required i n the SYMBOL SELECTION form, you must first k n o w h o w segment generation proceeds w i t h a finished symbol set. ASCII and symbol set characters are available for segment generating. You can activate t h e symbol set during segment generation by pressing a function key t o access these characters. If you press t h e <A> key on the PG keyboard while the symbol set i s turned on,the symbol assigned t o the character "A," n o t t h e character "A" itself, appears o n t h e CP monitor.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

The assignment o f ASCII characters t o symbols occurs i n the SYMBOL SELECTION form. The following ASCII characters may be assigned t w o symbols each:
*,A,*- *,
a*

/ ,ta W,

8,

1,

/ ,*o## -

8,

#*

a#

!a, /
" "

/'*l"

l
For clarity, the symbol set i s divided into t w o halves: upper and lower sets. You can use a function key t o switch between the upper and lower sets while generating segments.

-> USER DATA S Y M B O L

->

................................................................................
DRIVE: B SYMBOL SET NAME: SS1

SYMBOLS -> S E L E C T I O N

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

SOURCE SYMBOL: 0 FROM u p p e r SET TO BE STORED AS: P IN lower SET

F 1 GENERATE SYMBOL

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5 CHANGE SET

F 6 STORE SYMBOL

F 7

F 8 EXIT

If a symbol set already exists, the symbols are displayed i n their authentic sizes i n the last line on the CP monitor. To make it easier t o differentiate between symbols, the sizes are displayed i n alternating red and green colors. The ASCll character assigned t o each symbol is located above the symbol. The same representation occurs during segment generation, if you select the symbols.

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

If, in the SYMBOLS form, you chose a symbol set that does not yet exist, all symbols would be preassigned blank characters. However, since the standard symbol set already exists, you can choose an available symbol in the SOURCE SYMBOL field, modify it any way you like, and store it under the same or a different ASCII character in the TO BE STORED AS field. You can also select a character from the upper set, modify, and store i t in the lower set. In the SYMBOLSELECTIONform, select source symbol " 0 " in the lower set, and store i t as "P" i n the upper set. You can change the set half by pressing the < F5 CHANGE SET> function key. The switch occurs independent of the cursor position for either the SOURCE SYMBOL or the TO B STORED AS fields. E After you press the <F1 GENERATE SYMBOL> function key, the form should appear as follows:

-> SYMBOLS -> SYMBOL SELECTION G E N E R A T E S Y M B O L

SYMBOL SET NAME: SOURCE SYMBOL: FROM upper SET RESOLUTION: SS1

->
..................... *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** ***+** *** *** ****** *** *** ******** *** ****** ......................... ******** *** ****** ****** *** ****+* ****** *** *** *** *** *** *** **+

HIGH

The h i g h r e s o l u t i o n m o n i t o r has 18 p i x e l s and t h e l o w r e s o l u t i o n monitor 9 p i x e l s available i n a vertical direction. D e l e t e p i x e l s w i t h t h e space b a r .

t*****

F 1 CURSOR LEFT

F 2 CURSOR UP

F 3 CURSOR DOWN

F 4 CURSOR RIGHT

F 5 SYMBOL INVERSE

F 6 F 7 MIRROR MIRROR H O R I Z O N I . VERTICAL

F 8 EXIT

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C21 7-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Edit the symbol until it looks like the one described i n the next form. Experiment a little. You cannot destroy any data. The symbol is only saved t o the symbol set when you press the < F 6 STORE SYMBOL> function key in the SYMBOL SELECTION form. To do this, exit t h e SYMBOL GENERATION form by pressing the < F 8 EXIT> key.

I
You can drawthesymbol w i t h t h e <F1 CURSOR LEFT>, < F 2 CURSOR UP>, < F3 CURSOR DOWN>, and < F4 CURSOR RIGHT> function keys, and delete parts o f the symbol w i t h the space bar. INVERT and MIRROR functions are also available for creating symmetrical symbols.

-> SYMBOLS -> SYMBOL SELECTION G E N E R A T E S Y M B O L

SYMBOL SET NAME: SOURCE SYMBOL : FROM upper SET RESOLUTION: SS1

->
..................... *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** ****** *** *** ****** *** *** ******** *** ******

HIGH

********
****** ****** ***

.........................

The high r e s o l u t i o n monitor has 18 p i x e l s and t h e l o w resolution monitor 9 p i x e l S available i n a vertical direction. D e l e t e p i x e l s w i t h t h e space b a r .

***

*** *** *** *** ***

****** ****** ****** *** ***

F 1 CURSOR LEFT

F 2 CURSOR UP

F 3 CURSOR DOWN

F 4 CURSOR RIGHT

F 5 SYMBOL INVERSE

F 6 F 7 MIRROR MIRROR HORIZONT. V E R T I C A L

F 8 EXIT

Note that i n the enlarged symbol representation o n the PG screen, three stars placed horizontally, "***",represent one pixel t o eliminate distortion.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

After you store the symbol, the new symbol appears immediately i n the last line on the CP monitor, as long as the correct set half is turned on, and you can see the symbol in its actual size. Until this point, this modification takes place only in the P memory. After you generate G all symbols, exit the SYMBOL SELECTION form by pressing the < F 8 EXIT> function key, and then press the < F 6 STORE SYMB. SET> function key i n theSYMBOLS form. This saves the symbol set on the data medium (i.e., floppy diskette or hard disk). Since SS1 (or 552) isstill entered i n the SYMBOL SET NAME TO BE STORED field, COM asks whether you want t o overwrite the existing symbol set. The message STORE ALTHOUGH ELEMENT S S 1 ALREADY EXISTS? appears. The function key menu in the SYMBOLS form is replaced by the acknowledgment menu. Press the <F1 YES> function key t o answer yes, or the < F3 NO> function key t o answer no. If you respond affirmatively with the <F1 YES> function key, the old symbol set is overwritten by the new one on the data medium. If you respond negatively with the < F3 NO> function key, nothing is stored. You do not exit the SYMBOLS form and you have an opportunity t o modify the SYMBOL S T NAME E TO BE STORED field (i.e., change the name to "553"). Then press the < F 6 STORE SYMB. SET> function key again. After a short time, the message ELEMENT STORED appears. ExittheSYMBOL GENERATION form by pressing the < F 8 EXIT> function key. You again enter the PROGRAM USER DATA form.

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

5.4.2

Segments

To construct segments, designate a symbol set in the PROGRAM USER DATA form. For this S example, use symbol set S 3 (i.e., enter "553" in the SYMBOLSET NAME field).
l

Pressing the

< F1 SEGMENTS>

function key brings you t o the SEGMENTS form.

Fill in the SEGMENT field as shown. If you do not enter another name, the name from the SEGMENT field is copied into the NAME TO STORE &ASSIGN field.

Segments that already exist appear on the CP screen. When you create a new display, the screen is cleared.

-> SELECTION -> USER DATA S E G M E N T S

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

STATIC DISPLAY: SYMBOL SET NAME: SS3 SEGMENT: PART 1

Name o f SEGMENT t o STORE & ASSIGN: PART 1 CURSOR: L I N E 0 1 COLUMN 0 1 . C h a n g e b e t w e e n PG a n d CP c u r s o r b y p r e s s i n g e n t e r k e y

F 1

F 2 GENERATE SEGMENT

F 3 REPOS. SEGMENT

F 4 F 5 S T A T . D I S P ASSIGN OFF SEGMENT

F 6 STORE SEGMENT

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The < F GENERATE SEGMENT> function key brings you t o the segment editor (i.e., the 2 SEGMENT GENERATION form). Press the < F4 [Link] ON-OFF> and < F5 ASSIGN SEGMENT) function keys t o fit a segment into an existing static display. Designate the static display in the PROGRAM USER DATA form. You can switch it on and off w i t h the <F4 STAT-DlSPOFF> function key. The < F5 ASSIGN SEGMENT> function key is intended t o supplement static display generation. First, the segment is stored, just as when you press the < F6 STORE SEGMENT> function key; however, when you exit the form, the static display, which changed through the segment assignment, is also stored. The message STORE, ALTHOUGH ELEMENT ( ELEMENT NAME) ALREADY EXISTS? appears i f the static display already exists (i.e., an acknowledgment is required). The current cursor position i n the LINE and COLUMN fields determinesthe segment position in the static display (see also static displays - segment beginning). The < F REPOS. SEGMENT> function key allows you to reposition a preexisting, 3 modified segment within a static display, without having t o branch t o the segment editor.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

-> USER DATA -> SEGMENT -> G E N E R A T E S E G M E N T

STAT. D I S P . : CURSOR:

................................................................................
DRIVE: B SYMBOL SET: s s 3 SEGMENT: PART 1

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

L I N E 0 1 COLUMN 0 1 . C h a n g e b e t w e e n PG o p e r a t i o n a n d s e g m e n t g e n e r a t i o n a t CP/OP w i t h ENTER k e y ( o n l y i n m a i n m e n u ) . BACKGROUND: BLACK BACKGROUND: BLACK Block start: B l o c k end: S t a r t o f new b l o c k : SET, FOREGROUND: WHITE FOREGROUND: WHITE LINE: 0 1 LINE: 0 1 LINE: 0 1 FLASHING: H FLASHING: H

Char. a t t r i b u t e s : Attr. f o r colors: BLOCK OPERATIONS: STATUS : SYMBOLS OFF

COLUMN: 0 1 COLUMN: 0 1 COLUMN: 0 1 BACKGROUND ON

ASCII

WRITE VERTICALLY OFF,

F 1 CHANGE STATUS

F 2 CHAR.

F 3 LINE

F 4 COLUMN

F 5

F 6 COLOR

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

BLOCK

The segment editor is a tool that is easy t o use for constructing segment. Try out the various functions. You cannot destroy any data. The segment is only saved t o the data 6 medium when you exit the form by pressing the < F 8 EXIT> and < F STORE SEGMENT> function keys, or when you press the < F5 ASSlG N SEGMENT> function key in the SEGMENT form. When you either overwrite or exit the SEGMENTS form, the system prompts for verification.

NOTE: When you press the <ENTER > key, you can move the cursor on the C screen with the P cursor control keys (for further information on the "CP- CURSOR" mode, see Planning Guide COM GRAPH, subsection 3.6).

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter S

Try t o edit the segment i n the example as described. The individual editor functions are explained later in this chapter. You do not need t o think about the position of the segment on the screen. Segments are variable in position. Their final placement on the screen is determined in the STATIC DISPLAY form. The segment, PART1, should resemble the following figure:

First select the character attributes according t o the following steps: In the GENERATE SEGMENTform, in the "Character attributes" line, place the cursor i n P the BACKGROUND field. Choose "BLUE" as the background color t o conform t o the C parameters already set. You can either type in the word "BLUE", or enter i t by pressing the < F7 HELP> function key. Enter "CYAN" in the FOREGROUND COLOR field, and " N" in the FLASHING field (i.e., not flashing). Switch t o the "CP-CURSOR" mode by pressing the <ENTER> key. You can use the cursor P control keys, which usually move the cursor in the PG forms, t o move the cursor on the C screen. Note the tab function (for further information, see Planning Guide COM GRAPH, subsection 3.6). You can use the alphanumeric keyboard of your programmer for the C P monitor, but no longer for the programmer.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Write a few words. You can easily erase any characters with the REMOVE LINE function. The ACTIVE message flashes with each keystroke in the bottom right-hand corner of the programmer screen, as the yes signal is transferred t o the CP.
)

To access symbols in symbol set 553, press the following submenu appears:

< F1 CHANGE STATUS > function key. The

F 1 SYMBOLS ON-OFF

F 2 CHANGE SET

F 3 VERTICAL ON-OFF

F 4 BACKG. ON-OF F

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8 MAIN MENU

Among other functions, this submenu contains the SYMBOLS ON-OFF function. Pressing the < F1 SYMBOLS ON-OFF > function key brings you back t o the main menu. In the form, the "Status" line changes from SYMBOLS OFF - ASCI I S E T t o SYMBOLS ON - LOWER SET. In the last t w o lines on the C monitor, the symbols of the lower set appear with P their assigned ASCll characters. When you type the same words as before, i t is no longer the ASCll characters, but their P corresponding symbols, that appear in the assigned color on the C screen. Pressing the <F2 CHANGE SET> function key in the CHANGE STATUS submenu displays the upper symbol set on the screen. Turn on the lower symbol set and press the <CAPS LOCK> function key. Use the following keys t o construct the tank in this example: Upper left corner (tank size is 15 characters X 12 characters) Upper right corner Lower left corner Lower right corner Horizontal line (13) Vertical line (10) T-part

SiemensAG C79000-88576-C27 7-07

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The VERTICAL ON-OFF function in the CHANGE STATUS submenu allows you t o draw vertical lines easily. The cursor is not placed, as usual, in front and t o the right of the character last entered, but below it. By pressing the < F3 VERTICAL ON-OFF> function key once more, you can return t o the normal "WRITING" mode. You will not need the < F4 [Link] ON-OFF> function key until you generate a static display and want t o f i t a segment into it. Designate the static display in the PROGRAM USER DATA form. Use the < F4 [Link] ON-OFF> function key in the SEGMENTS and the GENERATE SEGMENT forms t o turn the static display on or off. Use the following function keys t o edit your segments:

< F2 CHAR. > - brings you t o the following submenu:

F 1 INSERT CHAR. F 2 REMOVE CHAR.
F 3

F 4 DELETE CHAR.

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8 M A 1N MENU

< F3 LINE > - brings you t o the following submenu:

F 1
INSERT LINE

F 2 REMOVE LINE

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8 MAIN MENU

< F4 COLUMN > - brings you t o the following submenu:

F 1 INSERT COLUMN F 2 REMOVE COLUMN F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6

F 7

F 8 M A 1N MENU

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter S

Generating Displays

If you designate a static display, it is not affected by any Delete or insert operations. You do not automatically return t o the main menu from the CHARACTER, LINE, and COLUMN submenus when carrying out a function, as is the case when you press the <F1 ) CHANGE STATUS> function key. This is because you usually want t o delete more than one character, line, or column.
NOTE: You cannot do any editing while you are in a submenu. For example, i f you press the <A> key while in a submenu, COM responds by displaying a C message. Return t o the P main menu by pressing the < F8 MAIN MENU > function key t o continue generating a segment.

Experiment with the functions; when the segment looks like the one in the figure, exit the form by pressing the < F8 EXIT> function key and save it by pressing the < F6 STORE SEGMENT> function key in the SEGMENT form. The Block and Coloring operations are especially helpful when generating several similar segments. In the SEGMENT form, the name of a segment t o be edited is specified in the SEGMENT field. The NAME OF SEGMENT TO STORE &ASSIGN field does not need the same name, so you can modify an existing display and save i t under a different name, the same way you do with symbol selection.

Coloring Operation For this example, you need a second tank exactly the same as the first one except for the color. In the NAME TO STORE field, enter "PARTZ", and in the SEGMENTfield, enter "PART1 ". Then, call up the segment editor again by pressing the < F2 GENERATE SEGMENT> function key. Segment PART1 reappears. Change the color of the display from "BLU EJCYAN" t o "BLU EJRED" and store it.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The COLOR submenu offers the following functions:

F 1 COLOR LEFT

F 2 COLOR

UP

F 3 COLOR DOWN

F 4 COLOR RIGHT

F 5 COLOR BLOCK

F 6 COLOR [Link].

F 7 VISU. ATTRIB.

F 8 MAIN MENU

When coloring, you must differentiate between t w o types of operation: conditional coloring unconditional coloring The COLOR BLOCK and COLOR TOTAL DISPLAY functions color the display conditional ly; the COLOR LEFT, COLOR UP, COLOR DOWN, and COLOR RIGHT functions color unconditionally.

Unconditional Coloring The segment takes on the attributes specified in the "Attr. for colors" line, regardless of the attributes that you previously assigned.

Conditional Coloring Only the characters that have the same attributes as in the "Character attributes" Iine are changed. They take on the new attribute that you assign in the "Attr. for colors" line. For example: Characters Attributes for All Characters in a Line BACKGROUND FOREGROUND CYAN YELLOW FLASHING N

123456789
ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR

BLUE BLUE YELLOW

RED

l
@

In the "Attr. for colors" line, enter "YELLOW" in the BACKGROUNDfield, "GREEN" i n the FOREGROUND field, and " N u in the FLASHING field. Place the C cursor on 3 in the first Iine. P
Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C277-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Press the < F6 COLOR> function key, and then the following function keys i n the order specified: <F4>, <F4>, <F4>, <F3>, <F3>, <F4>, <F4>, <F4>. Then pressthe <F8 MAIN MENU > function key t o return t o the main menu. The screen should have the following appearance:
123456789

ABCDEFGHI
JKLMNORQR

The characters 3456, F, and OPQ are green on a yellow background. The COLOR TOTAL DISPLAY function works conditionally. If in the "Char. attributes" line, you enter "YELLOW" in the BACKGROUND field, "GREEN" in the FOREGROUND field, and "Nu in the FLASHING field, and in the "Attr. for colors" line, you enter "WHITE" in the BACKGROUND field, "RED" i n the FOREGROUND field, and " N" in the FLASHING field, then when you execute the COLOR TOTAL DISPLAY function by pressing the < F6 COLOR [Link]> function key, all parts formerly green on a yellow background are displayed in red on a white background. The < F5 COLOR BLOCK> function key has the same effect, except that you can limit the color change, independent of the starting color condition, t o a rectangular display segment.

Block Operation The Block submenu offers the following functions:

F 1 BLOC K START

F 2 BLOCK END

F 3 REPOS. BLOCK

F 4 DELETE BLOCK

F 5 COPY BLOCK

F 6

F 7

F 8 MAIN MENU

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

With the Reposition Block, Delete Block, and Copy Block operations, you can define the block in one of t w o ways: Either by directly entering the line and column numbers in the appropriate fields i n the "Block start" and "Block end" lines, or by using the <F1 BLOCK START> and < F 2 BLOCK END> function keys. Pressing the < F1 BLOCK START> function key causes the CP cursor position coordinates t o appear in the LINE and COLUMN fields in the "Block start" Iine. Pressing the < F2 BLOCK END> function key causes the C cursor position parameters t o appear in the LINE P and COLUMN fields i n the "Block end" Iine. For example:
123456789 ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOPQR

Place the cursor on the C and press the < F5 COPY BLOCK> function key and then the <F1 BLOCK START> function key. Then place the cursor on the p and press the C F2 BLOCK END> function key. The area CDEFG and LMNOP is now defined as a block. To perform the Reposition and Copy operations, you must specify the position t o which you want t o copy or move the block. Do this either by entering the Iine and column numbers in the "Block start" line, or by moving the CP cursor t o the desired location. If you use the CP cursor for positioning, the numbers in the LINE and COLUMN fields i n the new "Block start" line change as the cursor moves. The Reposition Block operation causes the block t o be deleted at the old location, and appear at the new one. The Copy Block operation leaves the block intact. In this example, you can create the second tank by using the Copy Block operation.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

However, you should create a second segment since you can use segments in many static displays. The space is only occupied once in CP user memory. Also, a single segment is easier t o reposition within a static display.
I

Remember that you can also store often used segments in a library. Create the remaining segments so that they resemble the following. The figures on the left show how the segments will look; the figures on the right show the keys you should press t o create these symbols:
PART2: Use PART1 and change the color of the entire display from a "BLUE" background,

"CYAN" foreground, and " N u for flashing, t o a "BLUE" background, "RED" foreground, and "N" for flashing. Store the recolored display under the name PART2.

Segment name: Symbols used: Symbols

I

PART 3 uppercase lettersfrom the "lower" set Keys t o be used

1 I I
I

I I

I
I

L------

.------l

1
Note: the segment consists of 3 areas
1 4----+ 2 + - - - W
3
2

R R Z FFFF FFFFF W FFFFF FFFF C R M

Area: Background color: Foreground color: Flashing:

l

BLUE CYAN
N

BLUE BLUE MAGENTA RED

N N

SiemensAG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter S

Segment name: Symbols used: Symbols

PART 4 ASCll set Keys to be used

L I TERS

L ITERS

Background color: Foreground color: Flashing:

BLUE WHITE
N

Segment name: Symbols used: Symbols

PART 5 "upper" set Keys to be used

P4
Background col or: Foreground color: Flashing: BLUE CYAN
N

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-V 17-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Segment name: Symbols used :

l

PART 6 "lower" set Keys to be used

Symbols

63
Background color: foreground color: Flashing: BLUE YELLOW
Y

Segment name: Symbols used : Symbols

PART 7 "upper" set Keys to be used

Background color: Foreground color: Flashing:

BLUE RED
N

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

Segment name: Symbols used: Symbols

PART 8 ASCII set Keys t o be used

TANK 1

TANK 1

Background color: Foreground color: Flashing:

BLUE CYAN
N

Segment name: Symbols used: Symbols

PART 9 ASCll set Keys t o be used

TANK 2

TANK 2

Background color: Foreground color: Flashing:

BLUE RED
N

Use the same procedure as described i n the tank example t o generate the remaining displays.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

5.4.3

Static Displays

In the static display, you define segments, their positions, and the symbol set with which
I they are displayed.

You must declare the name of static display BACK1 and symbol set SS3 in the PROGRAM USER DATA form. Pressing the C F2 STATIC DISPLAY > function key brings you t o the STATIC DISPLAY form. The symbol sets that you used t o generate the segments must correspond t o the one specified. However, once you generate a segment, you can later change the symbol set you used t o generate the display (i.e., with an acknowledgment). You may want t o do thiswhen the symbol sets differ only in details (e.g., representing switches in different norms). To determine the final position of the segment, enter the coordinates in the LINE and COLUMN fields manually or by using the C cursor. If you use the C cursor, line and P P column coordinates are input automatically. Pressing the <F1 INSERT SEGMENT> function key enters the next consecutive number available (i.e., beginning with 1) in the DISP-NO. field. To insert a segment at a particular location, simply enter the number. The spot where you insert the segment is important i f there are gaps in it. Gaps are places in the segment that have no characters. If displays are layered, then the order of specification in the static display determines which segment is in front and which is behind on the CP screen. A segment neither needs any particular form, nor must i t cover a continuous area. The character at the farthest upper left location represents the beginning of the segment.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-0 1

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

For example: segment beginning

I I

v
+

*********

****R*****

If during segment generating, you use the space bar t o enter blanks between the asterisks, and you assign this segment last in order, blank spaces cover the displays behind the segment. However, i f you jump over the blank space using the C cursor keys, you can P see the displays behind it. The name of the segment is only important with the < F1 INSERT SEGMENT> function key. You can enterthe name either in the P-D NAME field manually, or by pressing the < F7 HELP> function key. The DISP-NO field identifies the number of the segment that the <F2 REPOS. SEGMENT>, <F3 SEGMENT> and < F4 DELETE SEGMENT> function keys use t o perform their functions. Use the < F SEGMENT> function key t o set the CP cursor t o the starting point of the 3 segment.
NOTE: Please note that you can also mark the starting point with a blank space. In this case, you could mistake this for a segment beginning. If the segment that you insert or reposition does not seem t o appear at the right spot, try t o determine whether the display really starts where you think it does.

Define the position for segment PART1 as shown on the next page and insert it i n display number 1 by pressing the < F1 INSERT SEGMENT> function key.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 1 7-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

-> SELECTION S T A T I C

->

................................................................................
DRIVE: B DISP-NO: BACK1 0 1 SEGMENT: PART 1 SEGMENT : SEGMENT POS.
7

USER DATA -> D I S P L A Y

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

[Link]: BACK1 SYMBOL SET: SS3 L I N E 0 5 COL.04 (ENTER) S t o r e : [Link]: SEGMENT POS. 0 1 PART 1 04 07 10 13 05, 0 4 02 05
08
9

SEGMENT

POS. 03 06 09 12 15 18 21 24 27 30

16
19 22 25 28 31 F 1 INSERT SEGMENT F 2 REPOS. SEGMENT

1 1 14 17 20

*
9

23
7
9

t
t

26 29 32 F 4 REMOVE SEGMENT

t t

F 3 SEGMENT START

F 5 STORE AS SEGMENT

F 6 STORE [Link]

F 7
HELP

F 8 EXIT

Insert one segment after another into the static display. Make deliberate mistakes when entering the line and column numbers, so you can practice with the < F2 REPOS. SEGMENT> and < F4 REMOVE SEGMENT> function keys. When the static display is finished, the screen should have the following appearance:

SiemensAG C79000-88576-U17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

-> SELECTION S T A T I C

COROS / COM -> USER DATA -> D I S P L A Y DEVICE : ................................................................................ DRIVE:

GRAPH CP526

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

[Link]: BACK1 SYMBOL SET: SS3 LINE 17 [Link] (ENTER) Store: [Link]: SEGMENT POS. 0 1 PART 1 0 4 PART 4 0 7 PART 9 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 31
F 1 INSERT SEGMENT

DISP-NO: BACK1

0 1 SEGMENT: PART 9 SEGMENT : SEGMENT POS. 0 3 PART 4 0 6 PART 8 09 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 0 3 , 12 02, 0 8

SEGMENT 0 2 PART 2 05PART3 08 1 1 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 F 4 REMOVE SEGMENT

POS. 0 5 , 26 17, 1 1
7
9 9

05, 0 4 03, 3 4 02, 3 0

7
9 9 9

.
t
9

9
9

*
7
7

.
F 3 SEGMENT START

,
F 5 STORE AS SEGMENT F 6 STORE STAT-DISP

F 2 REPOS. SEGMENT

F 7
HELP

F 8 EXIT

Store the display i n the program EXAMPLE on drive B by pressing the < F6 STORE [Link]> function key. The name of the display t o store is taken from the STORE: STATIC DISP. field. Therefore, you can modify, just as with segments, an existing static display, and store i t under a different name. If you try t o overwrite an existing display, COM requests an acknowledgment t o the prompt STORE, ALTHOUGH ELEMENT BACKl
ALREADY EXISTS?.

Now generate static display BACKO using symbol set 553. To do this, change the display name t o BACKO i n the PROGRAM USER DATA form, call up the STATIC DISPLAYS form by pressing the < F2 STATIC DISPLAYS> function key, and store static display BACKO by pressing the < F6 STORE STAT-DISP> function key, without inserting any segment.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Static display BACK0 contains no segments and is therefore empty. It may seem pointless t o have an empty static display, but you need i t for the display output command START that is described in section 2.4. You can store up t o 32 segments in a static display. If you use extremely small segments, so that 32 segments are not enough, or if you want t o join three segments together t o make a new segment, use the < F5 STORE AS SEGMENT> function key. The static display that you generate this way is stored in the form of a segment. You can use the segment editor to further edit this segment.
COM takes the name of the segment t o store from the SEGMENT field.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter S

5.4.4

Dynamic Displays General

[Link]

With dynamic displays, you can represent values from data blocks in the programmable controller i n either digital or analog form o n the CP monitor. You can make the display attributes (e.g., background color, foreground color) dependent upon the status o f a flag bit, or upon a data block value. You can therefore represent measured value overranges or underranges i n an easily recognizable form. You can also output segments, depending o n flag conditions or data block values. This is how the program EXAMPLE represents a valve i n the t w o states, open and closed. Since the flag status and the values i n the controller are constantly changing (i.e., the control program runs cyclically), the values needed t o represent t h e display must be repeatedly fetched from the controller, a t predetermined time intervals. These t i m e intervals are called the "update rate" in COM. The dynamic display consists of several fields. The exact number o f maximum permissible fields varies greatly, and depends on the type o f fields programmed. You can represent each of these fields by a value from another data block. To do this, a part o f the block must be fetched, which takes a relatively high amount o f time, regardless of the number of words t o be transferred. Therefore, you should enter as many values as needed t o represent a dynamic display i n one data block. COM organizes the dynamic display so that all values needed i n a display that are located i n one data block are loaded simultaneously.
NOTE:

You can only load a block of words.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C21 7-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

For example, in a dynamic display there are t w o value output fields. Field 1 represents the value from CPU 1, data block DB2, and data word DW20; field 2 represents the value from CPU l,082, and DW 1 50.
I

While the application program processes this display, DB2 is fetched from CPU 1. In multiprocessor operation, you can specify which CPU the DB belongs t o in the CPU NO. field. Since DWZO and DW150 must be represented, the entire data block range from DW20 t o DW150 is fetched. This takes less time than retrieving one word twice. Therefore, organize your data blocks as compactly as possible, t o avoid transferring unnecessary data. Transferring in blocks is especially important with input fields. For an output field, you must define from which data block and at which starting address the display value should be fetched. For an input field, you must define in which data block and a t which starting address the input value, entered via the process keyboard, should be stored. The input fields are supplied with the current values in the blocks when the display is C called (e.g., by a display output command or P job order). All input fields that relate t o a common block are again grouped together, as shown in the following example: input field 1 : CPU 2, DB3, DW45 input field 2: CPU 2, DB3, DWI 10 In this case, the block from DW 45 t o DWI 10 i s fetched. When you make inputs in both fields via the process keyboard, these inputs have as yet, in the data block itself, no effect and can therefore still be corrected as desired.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-0 1

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The input values are not transferred t o the controller until you press the <ENTER>

key.

An effective way t o optimize the speed of your dynamic displays is t o adjust the update rate, which can be determined separately for each output field. The grading can range from 0.1 second t o 5 minutes (refer t o Planning Guide COM GRAPH, Chapter 4, Appendix 1). In programming, try t o keep the image on the screen as similar as possible t o the actual process. With quickly changing values, you must therefore reach an update rate of 0.1 seconds. The data blocks must be fetched from the controller within this amount of time (depending on the organization), and the values transformed from the format stored i n the controller into recognizable characters. Before transformation, the values can be converted using gain and offset (see the description of value input and value output fields later i n this section). If you are displaying many values (e.g., with tables), the updating time cannot be maintained. There are three solutions t o this problem Represent few fields in a display, do without gain and offset conversion, and organize data in the controller so that all necessary values are located in one data block without gaps. Assign reasonable update rates. Occasionally switch off updating of certain fields by using flags.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-(277-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

For example, in a display representing a motor test stand, you have a bar that symbolizes the motor speed and ten temperatures from different sections of the motor. The speed of the motor can change relatively quickly, and should therefore be updated at a rate of ten times per second. For the temperatures, depending on the application, updating every ten seconds would probably be enough. The ten temperature fields are therefore updated after every hundredth update o f a speed bar, which makes i t possible t o maintain the updating time of the bar. Try t o assign a slow update rate wherever possible, t o enable fast update rates t o be maintained where they are necessary. Another way to increase the speed is t o make the updating of slow fields (e.g., temperatures) dependent upon an interprocessor communication flag bit by designating a flag i n the WHEN UPDATING DEPENDENT ON FLAG BIT: ###.#field. Then the field is only updated if the flag is set. The flag can be set and reset either by the control program, or you can set and reset it by entering a set bit command with the process keyboard.

Siemens AG C79000-58576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

[Link]

How t o Generate DYNl

The dynamic display DYN1 is used in the program EXAMPLE. It consists o f t w o value input fields, t w o value output fields, t w o bar fields, t w o figure fields, and one time output field. The SWITCHOVER field consists of t w o value output fields; one o f the fields is output, depending on the status of a flag. A possible application might be t o convert data block values one way when the flag is set, and another way when it is not set, such as displaying a temperature either in Celsius or i n Fahrenheit. In the PROGRAM USER DATA form, specify static display BACK1 and dynamic display DY N1. Branch t o the PROGRAM DYNAMIC DISPLAY form by pressing the < F3 DY NAM. DISPLAYS> function key. The static display is now on the C monitor. With a preexisting dynamic display, the P dynamic fields would be marked by the symbols "?", " + ","&", and " >" (see form). You determine the position of a field either with the C cursor by pressing the < ENTER > key P or manually, in the LINE and COLUMN fields. You determine the type of a field (e.g., input, output, etc.) by pressing one of the function keys in any of the three part menus, that may be reached by pressing the < F6 CONTINUE > function key.

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

-> SELECTION P R O G R .

->

................................................................................
DRIVE: B STAT. D I S P : BACK1 SYMBOL SET: s s 3

USER DATA -> D Y N A M I C

D I S P L A Y

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

DYN. D I S P : D Y N l CURSOR : F I E L D NO. 0 0 1

L I N E : 0 3 COLUMN: 0 6 C h a n g e b e t w e e n PG a n d CP/OP c u r s o r b y p r e s s i n g ENTER k e y F o r CHANGE F I E L D , DELETE F I E L D , a n d MOVE F I E L D t h e f i e l d number i s v a l i d . The l i n e and column o n l y a p p l y i f n o e n t r y h a s b e e n made f o r t h e f i e l d n u m b e r . DYNl Output & Bar

NAME t o b e s t o r e d :

Field representation: 7 Input

>
F 6

Shape

F 1 VALUE INPUT

F 2 VALUE OUTPUT

F 3 BAR

F 4 SHAPE

F 5 STORE DYN. D I S P

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

CONTINUE

F 1 PREVIOUS FIELD

F 2 NEXT FIELD

F 3 CHANGE FIELD

F 4 DELETE FIELD

F 5 MOVE FIELD

F 6 CONTINUE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

F 1 ENTER DATE

F 2 ENTER TIME

F 3 OUTPUT DATE

F 4 OUTPUT TIME

F 5 [Link] FIELD

F 6 CONTINUE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

After the display is completed, you can store it on the data medium by pressing the < F5 STORE DYN. DISP> function key. The display name t o be stored is taken from the PROGRAM DYNAMIC DISPLAY form. The field is preassigned with the input from the DYNAMIC DISPLAY form. You can decompile and edit an existing display, and store i t under a different name, just as you can with segment and static displays. If the display already exists, an acknowledgment is requested before overwriting. The second part menu contains the functions necessary t o edit existing displays. The < F3 CHANGE FIELD > function key redisplays a selected, already existing field that you can edit and store again. During editing, the field i s optically removed from the C P monitor, and the static display reappears at this location, i f i t was specified. Fields can be selected i n several ways:

By pressing the < F1 PREVIOUS FIELD> or < F2 NEXT FIELD> function keys - The line, column, and field numbers are input automatically. If no fields exist, an error message results. By specifying the line and column numbers: The field number is input automatically. If no field exists at this position, an error message results. By specifying the field number - You may not make an entry in the LINE or COLUMN field. The line and column numbers are entered automatically. If no field with this number exists, an error message results.

The < F4 DELETE FIELD > function key causes the selected field t o be deleted after a positive acknowledgment.

Chapter S

Generating Displays

W i t h t h e <F5 MOVE FIELD> function key, you can change t h e position of a field. Select the field, and t h e n press the < F5 MOVE FIELD> function key. The message FIELD/WINDOW COUPLED - USE F5 TO STORE! indicates t h e dual function o f this function key. Place the cursor a t t h e desired n e w location, and press t h e < F5 MOVE I FIELD> function key once more. The field is deleted a t the o l d position, t h e background reappears, and t h e field i s output a t t h e n e w position. The <F1 VALUE INPUT>,<F2 VALUE OUTPUT>, <F3 BAR>, and < F4 FIGURE> function keys in t h e first part menu and t h e < F1 DATE INPUT>, < F2 TIME INPUT>, < F3 DATE OUTPUT>, <F4 TIME OUTPUT>, and <F5 SWITCHOV. FIELD> function keys in t h e third part menu determine t h e field type. YOUmust place t h e cursor on a "free" position. Only one field can b e represented per location. The error message Generation not possible; position reserved ! tells you when a field already exists a t a given location. The error message Field no longer fits in dynamic display ! means t h a t t h e field exceeds t h e maximum length o f a dynamic display. The number o f possible fields depends t o a great extent upon t h e type o f fields programmed. In general, approximately 100 fields are possible.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27-0 7 1

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

[Link]

Value Input Field

Position the cursor for the program EXAMPLE on line 3, column 6, and press the <F1 VALUE INPUT> function key.

-> USER DATA -> PROGR. DYNAMIC DISPLAY V A L U E I N P U T F I E L D

DYN. DISP: DYNl generate FIELD: 0 0 1

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................
STAT. DISP: BACK1 LINE: 03 SYMBOL SET: ss3 COLUMN: 06

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

I n p u t i s s t o r e d i n CPU-No.1, DB 020 f r o m ADDRESS D 000. W , FORMAT 16BIT FXP CHAR. POSITIONS 05.0. The a c t u a l v a l u e s t o r e d i s c a l c u l a t e d f r o m VALUE=(INPUT - ( 0 V )) (1 V

L i m i t v a l u e s : UPPER L I M I T : d i r e c t 10000 or indirect or indirect LOWER L I M I T : d i r e c t 0 I n d i r e c t l y s p e c i f i e d l i m i t v a l u e s and c o n v e r s i o n f a c t o r s r e s i d e i n t h e i n p u t DB, i n d i r e c t l i m i t v a l u e s use t h e same t y p e o f memory access as t h e i n p u t v a l u e . COLORS & ATTRIBUTES: STATIC BACKGROUND COLOR: WHITE O n l y f i l l i n f o r s t a t i c C&A: FOREGROUND COLOR: BLACK FLASHING: N

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6 STORE FIELD

F 7 HELP

F 8
EXIT

Besides the drive and program name, the form contains the following additional information on the programming environment: the name of the dynamic display, static display, and symbol set; the code GENERATE or EDIT before the field number; the field position (i.e., line and column numbers). This information is contained in all forms that you can reach by pressing any of the above mentioned keys. If you experience any difficulty in operating the forms, or i f you get error messagesthat give no direct clue as t o the cause of the error, look in the Planning Guide (Chapter 4). There you can find complete information on permissible inputs.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-017-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

In the VALUE INPUT FIELD form, you must input the CPU number, DB number, and starting address of the field. The CPU-NO. field defines, in multiprocessor operation, which CPU thedata block belongs to. You can find further information on multiprocessor operation in the C description P (Chapter 3). The DB field designates the number of the data block from which data is fetched when the display is called or t o which input data is written after you press the C ENTER> key on the process keyboard, thus activating the inputs in the process. The DB field is preassigned with current values. The ADDRESS field has three parts: # # ###. ## The first part (##) designates the memory access type, and the second part (###) designates the actual address in the data block. You only need t o fill i n the third part (.##) i f bit (BI) was assigned in the memory access part, in which case i t designates the bit within the word. The Planning Guide (Chapter 4, Appendix) contains a table with the allowed combinations of memory access, format, and character locations. The FORMAT field designates the STEP 5 format in which the corresponding address in the data block is specified. All STEP S formats are acceptable (i.e., byte, character, binarycoded (BCD), fixed-point (FXP), floating-point (FLP), timer, and counter). The CHAR. POSITIONS field determines the length of the field displayed on the C P monitor. There are restrictions i n the combination of format and memory access type (see also Planning Guide, Chapter 4, Appendix).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 77-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

ThelineVALUE = (INPUT - ( 0 v # # # ) ) / (1 V # # # ) intheCONVERSlONfield means that the value you enter on t h e process keyboard is reduced by an amount you can specify (e.g., offset, presetting O), and then divided by another amount (e.g., gain, presetting l), before being entered i n t h e data block. Detailed information on converting w i t h gain and offset i s given i n subsection 3.1 1.3, 'Display of Process Data'. You can specify the value either directly i n the form, by overwriting the presetting, or indirectly, by entering an address. The advantage of indirect specification is that t h e controller can influence the conversion during run time. If you specify an address for indirect conversion, the address refers t o the CPU number and t h e data block specified i n t h e " Input i s stored in" line. The memory access type for indirect conversion factors is always data double word (DD). Direct and indirect values for gain or offset cannot be specified simultaneously. However, gain can be assigned a direct value and offset an indirect value, and vice versa. The following formula appears i n the VALUE INPUT FIELD form: VALUE = (INPUT - ( 0
V

###)) / ( 1

###)

It is the supplement t o the following formula, which appears i n the VALUE OUTPUT FIELD form:

OUTPUT = VALUE

( 1 v ###)

(0 v ###)

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27 7-01

Chapter S

Generating Displays

Example: In DB4, starting at DWIO, there i s a measured value available i n BCD format. The value corresponds t o the voltage of a digital measuring device, which is connected t o the controller via AD transformers. Since the voltage o f a tachometer is being measured, the value is directly proportional t o motor speed. If 500 rpm corresponds t o the value 100 i n the DB, then 5 must be specified as the gain, and 0 as the offset. When the value is output, it i s first multiplied by 5, and added t o 0 before the result is output o n the screen. For inputs (e.g., t o preset the speed), the input value is reduced by 0 and divided by 5, so that the controller receives the value the same as it sends it. Inputs o n the process keyboard can be checked for validity, similar t o the way incorrect inputs are rejected by COM. You can specify Iimits that are fetched either directly or indirectly from the controller for this purpose (see also subsection 3.11.3, 'Display of Process Data'). Indirect limits, like conversion factors, are located i n the same data block as specified i n t h e "Input is stored in" line. The type o f memory access that applies t o the input also applies t o the limit value (conversion factors are always DD).

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-0 1

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The COLORS &ATTRIBUTES field is where the parameters for background color, foreground color, and flashing are set. These should be entered the way the field is later t o appear on the screen. These entries have no influence on a dynamic display while i t is being generated. A dynamic display is always generated with the shield attributes that were assigned during C parameter setting. P Store the field i n the form by pressing the < F6 STORE FIELD> function key. The field then appears on the CP monitor in its actual length. To generate the second value input field, position the cursor on line 3, column 28, and press the <F1 VALUE INPUT> function key. The second value input field should look just like the first one, but the input values should be stored in data block 20, data word 1. Since the VALUE INPUT FIELD form is still filled in with the values that you entered for the first value input field, change the entry in the ADDRESS field, and store the value input field by pressing the <F6 STORE FIELD> function key.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

[Link]

Value Output Field

The first value output field for the example is positioned i n line 4, column 6.

-> USER DATA -> PROGR. DYNAMIC DISPLAY V A L U E O U T P U T F I E L D

DYN. DISP: DYNl generate FIELD: 003

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................
STAT. DISP: BACK1 LINE: 04

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

SYMBOL SET: s s 3 COLUMN: 0 6

W , FORMAT 1 6 B I T FXP O u t p u t i s f e t c h e d f r o m CPU-No.1, DB 020 f r o m ADDRESS D 000. CHAR. POSITIONS 0 5 . 0 . The a c t u a l v a l u e o u t p u t i s c a l c u l a t e d f r o m OUTPUT = VALUE * ( 1 v ) + (0 V )

I n d i r e c t l y s p e c i f i e d c o n v e r s i o n f a c t o r s r e s i d e a s DD i n t h e o u t p u t DB. UPDATE RATE: 1

s
I f u p d a t i n g d e p e n d e n t o n FLAG B I T : F

COLORS & ATTRIBUTES: FLAG-CONTROLLED O n l y f i l l i n f o r s t a t i c C&A: BACKGROUND COLOR: FOREGROUND COLOR: FLASHING :

F 1 DYNAM. C&A

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6 STORE FIELD

F 7

HELP

EXIT

For information o n the CPU-NO., DB, ADDRESS, FORMAT, and CHAR. POSITIONS fields, and conversion factors, see p. 4-43, which specifies the same attributes for value output fields.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The value specified in the UPDATE RATE field, and the flag (which is optional) specified i n the IF UPDATING DEPENDENT ON FLAG BIT field, control cyclic rejuvenation of the values output on the screen. You should choose updating times that are possible t o maintain. Especially avoid specifying small time intervals where unnecessary (see also [Link]). The COLORS & ATTRIBUTES field works somewhat differently with output fields than with input fields. With an output field, you can make C screen representation P conditional either upon a flag (i.e., t w o states) or upon a value in the data block (i.e., eight states maximum). The value must be located in the same data block as specified i n the "Output is fetched from" line. The memory access type is always data word (DW). For the program EXAMPLE, specify "FLAG CONTROLLED" in the COLORS &ATTRIBUTES field, and branch t o the C & A FLAG CONTROLLED form by pressing the < F1 DY NAM.C&A > function key. You get t o the C&A DB CONTROLLED form by specifying " DB CONTROLLED" and pressing the < F1 DYNAM.C&A> function key. Fill in the C&A FLAG CONTROLLED form as shown on the next page, and exit the form by pressing the < F6 ENTER DATA> function key. You are once again in the VALUE OUTPUT FIELD form. Then store the field i n the dynamic display by pressing the < F6 STORE FIELD> function key. Position the second VALUE OUTPUT field in line 4, column [Link] output value should be and the colors and attributes should be fetched from data block 20, data word l, controlled by flag F 20.1. To do this, change the ADDRESS field in the VALUE OUTPUT FIELD form, and the flag in the C&A FLAG CONTROLLED form. Then store the field by pressing the < F6 ENTER DATA> function key twice.

- @ Siemens AG

C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

-> PROGR. DYNAMIC DISPLAY -> SPEC. FELD C & A F L A G C O N T R O L L E D

DYN. D I S P : D Y N l generate FIELD: 003

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................
STAT. D I S P : BACK1 LINE: 0 4 FLAG : FLAG B I T FLAG B I T
= 0 :

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

SYMBOL SET: ss3 COLUMN: 0 6

020.0 FOREGROUND COLOR WHITE WHITE FLASHING N Y

= 1 :

BACKGROUND COLOR BLACK BLACK

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6 SAVE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

[Link]

Bar Output

Numeric values are represented i n analog form using bars. In the example, the liquid level i n the tank is represented by a bar. For the first bar, position the cursor i n line 14, column 8, and press the < F3 BAR> function key in the PROGRAM DYNAMIC DISPLAY form Value output w i t h bars is structured similarly t o digital value output; you only need t o enter a few additional parameters.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

-> USER DATA -> PROGR. DYNAMIC DISPLAY B A R O U T P U T

DYN. DISP: DYNl generate FIELD: 005

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................
STAT. DISP: BACK1 LINE: 15

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

SYMBOL SET: ss3 COLUMN: 05

W O u t p u t i s f e t c h e d f r o m CPU-No.1, DB 020 f r o m ADDRESS D 000.$, FORMAT 16BIT FXP The a c t u a l v a l u e o u t p u t i s c a l c u l a t e d from V ) + ( o V ) OUTPUT = VALUE * ( 1 I n d i r e c t l y s p e c i f i e d c o n v e r s i o n f a c t o r s r e s i d e i n t h e o u t p u t DB. UPDATE RATE: 1 s
I f u p d a t i n g dependent on FLAG B I T : F

BAR TYPE: VERTICAL WIDTH: 13 max. l e n g t h s : NEGATIVE 00 POSITIVE 10 Max. v a l u e i n p o s i t i v e d i r e c t i o n : 10000 ( I n n e g a t i v e d i r e c t i o n , i f POSITIVE=OO) COLORS & ATTRIBUTES: STATIC O n l y f i l l i n f o r s t a t i c C&A: BACKGROUND COLOR: BLUE FOREGROUND COLOR: CYAN FLASHING:
F 1 D NAM . Y C&A F 2
F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6 STORE FIELD

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

The BAR TYPE field determines t h e direction o f the bar. Enter either "HORIZONTAL" o r "VERTICAL". The WIDTH field determines the w i d t h in characters o f a vertical bar o r the height in characters o f a horizontal bar. The MAX. LENGTHS field determines t h e character length o f a bar in a positive o r negative direction.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Chapter S

Generating Displays

The MAXIMUM VALUE IN POSITIVE DIRECTION field shows the maximum numeric value with reference t o the maximum bar length. Fill in the fields as shown, and store the output field by pressing the < F 6 STORE FIELD> function key. You then return t o the PROGRAM DYNAMIC DISPLAY form. The bar is represented on the monitor by a series of "&" symbols. The second bar is positioned i n line 15, column 27. The output should be fetched from data block 20, data word 1. Change the foreground coior t o red; the remaining inputs can be taken from the first bar. Change the inputs in the ADDRESS and FOREGROUND COLOR fields, and store the field by pressing the < F6 STORE FIELD> function key. Then store it in the dynamic display by pressing the <F5 STORE DYN. DISP> function key.

[Link]

Shape Output

You use the SHAPE OUTPUT function t o output segments, depending either on a flag bit (i.e., two states), or on the value in a data block (i.e., 16 states maximum). In the example, this i s the way a valve is displayed either in an open or a closed state. The segments can be any size (e.g., the valve in the example consists of only one symbol). The specified position of the shape field in the dynamic display refers t o the beginning of the segment (see also segment beginning). The position Note that the segment is not represented in its full size, but as a single " of the SHAPE field in the dynamic display indicates the start of the segment. With complex segments, use the <F2 REPOS. SEGMENT> function key in the SEGMENT form t o determine whether the segment fits into the static display at this location.
>.l1

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-0 1

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

Generate t w o shape fields for the left and right tanks i n the static display. Press the < F 4 FIGURE> function key t o enter the SHAPE OUTPUT form. The data you should input i s shown in the following t w o forms:

-> USER DATA -> PROGR. DYNAMIC DISPLAY S H A P E O U T P U T

DYN. DISP: DYNl generate FIELD: 007 UPDATE RATE: 1

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................

COROS / C M GRAPH O DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

STAT. DISP: BACK1 SYMBOL SET: ss3 LINE: 18 COLUMN: 16

When u p d a t i n g dependent on FLAG B I T : F

.
ifn o t ,

Ifa l t e r n a t i v e dependent on SWITCHOVER FLAG: F 020.0 ( A l t e r n a t i v e s 0.1). t h e a1 t e r n a t i v e ( 0 . . 15) i s f e t c h e d f r o m CPU-No. DB: ADDRESS: Note:

= Segment does n o t e x i s t ,

7 = name wrong ( d e l e t e d w i t h YES ack.)

2: 6: 10 : 14: F 4 F 5 F 6 STORE FIELD 3: 7: 11: 15: F 7 HELP F 8 EXIT

0: PART6 4: 8: 12 : F 1 F 2

1: PART5 5: 9: 13 : F 3

The UPDATE RATE, WHEN UPDATING DEPENDENT ON FLAG BIT, CPU, DB, and ADDRESS fields have the usual meanings. You may specify either the SWITCHOVER FLAG field, or the CPU, DB, and ADDRESS fields. In the ALTERNATIVES O,1 field, enter segments that are output depending on the condition of a flag bit. If you specify the CPU number, DB,and address, then you can enter from 2 t o 16 segments. The display that is then output depends on the respective value i n the data block (i.e., 0 t o 15).

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

-> USER DATA -> PROGR. DYNAMIC DISPLAY S H A P E O U T P U T

DYN. DISP: DYNl generate FIELD: 008 UPDATE RATE: 1 s

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

STAT. DISP: BACK1 SYMBOL SET: ss3 LINE: 18 COLUMN: 28

When u p d a t i n g dependent on FLAG B I T : F

.
i f not,

I f a l t e r n a t i v e dependent on SWITCHOVER FLAG: F 0 2 0 . 1 ( A l t e r n a t i v e s 0 . 1 ) . t h e a l t e r n a t i v e ( 0 . . 15) i s f e t c h e d f r o m CPU-No. DB: ADDRESS:

Note:

= Segment does n o t e x i s t ,

7 = name wrong ( d e l e t e d w i t h YES ack.) 2: 6: 10: 14: F 4 F 5

F 6 STORE FIELD

0: PART6 4: 8: 12: F 1

1: PART7 5: 9: 13:

3: 7: 11: 15 :

F 2

F 3

F 7
HELP

F 8 EXIT

[Link]

Time Output

The CP 526 has a built-in clock that you can integrate into the display at any location. The output format i s determined i n the TIME OUTPUT FIELD form. Parts of the specification can be missing, so that only hours, minutes, or seconds are output. Double specifications or gaps are not permitted.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

NOTE: With date and time input, you must enter the complete specification, in any order

You can change the dividing characters between H, M, and S (and between M, D, and Y for date) in the CPIOP PARAM. ASSIGNMENT form. The US standard is the ":"symbol for time and the "l" symbol for date.
USER DATA -> PROGR. DYNAMIC D I S P L A Y T I M E O U T P U T F I E L D

->

->
DRIVE: B

................................................................................
STA T. D I S P : B A C K 1 SYMBOL SET: LINE: 23 COLUMN: 73

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE : CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE ss3

DYN. D I S P : D Y N l generate F I E L D : 09

TIME:

H - Hour

Minute

Second

BACKGROUND COLOR: RED

FOREGROUND COLOR: WHITE

FLASHING: N

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6 STORE FIELD

F 7 HELP

F 8

EXIT

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

5.4.5 [Link]

Pixel Graphics
General

You can only use the pixel graphics functions with the expansion board. The pixel graphics functions substantially increase the possibilities for process visualization. The following four pixel graphics window types are available: curve windows bar windows pixel graphics value output windows pixel graphics text output windows In curve windows, you can represent measured values from the controller as a function of time. They are defined as a rectangle that covers a part of the screen. All data necessary t o represent one or more curves is contained i n one curve window. Bar windows are, as i n the character-based graphics, a special form o f representation for numeric values in bar form. In addition t o the character-based graphics, a value can be defined which, when exceeded, causes the color o f the bar t o change. The pixel graphics value output function allows you t o view process data on the video screen i n up t o 16 sizes, 4 directions, and 8 colors. Pixel graphics text outputs are static texts that describe the other windows. You can assign an individual update rate for each curve, bar window, and value output. Each specification may be selected, due t o speed rates, from preset time intervals. Eight different update rates are possible (with curves, the controller is an added alternative). For each window, the values t o be output can be fetched from any controller data block.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The transfer o f data blocks between the CP and controller takes considerable time. Therefore, t o avoid slowing down display updating, you should limit access t o only one data block, whenever possible. A pixel graphics display can contain up t o 40 windows. The program EXAMPLE consists o f the pixel graphics displays PXG 1 and PXGZ.

[Link]

Description of the Pixel Graphics Display PXGl

The following paragraphs describe how t o generate the pixel graphics display PXG 1, consisting o f t w o pixel graphics text outputs. In the PROGRAM USER DATA form, enter "PXG1 ",the name of the first display, i n the PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY field. All other fields in this form remain blank t o generate PXG1. The STATIC DISPLAY, SYMBOLSET NAME, and DYNAMIC DISPLAY fields i n the PROGRAM USER DATA form define parts o f the pixel graphics display that you are generating or editing. To make it easier t o f i t a pixel graphics display into a total display, you can preassign t h e background a static background display and a dynamic display (input w i t h the < F7 HELP> function key i s possible). Once the display names are entered, the C screen i s preprocessed w i t h the specified P displays. Dynamic value outputs and time outputs are marked by " + ,"dynamic value inputs by "7," bars by " &," and figures by " >," o n the C screen. Press the < F3 PlXEL P GRAPHICS> function key t o enter the PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY form. In this form, you define the positions o f the windows i n a pixel graphics display o n the CP screen. (The location o f the reference point of a window is explained in the detailed description o f the individual windows on the following pages).

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

->

................................................................................
PXLGRA. D : PXG1

SELECTION -> USER DATA -> P I X E L G R A P H I C D I S P L A Y

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526 PROGRAM: EXAMPLE SS. :

DYN.D.:

DRIVE: B STAT.D.:

CURSOR : WINDOW NO.:

01

LINE: 10 COLUMN: 1 8 Change b e t w e e n PG and CP c u r s o r b y p r e s s i n g ENTER k e y F o r CHANGE WINDOW, DELETE WINDOW a n d MOVE WINDOW t h e window number i s v a l i d . The l i n e a n d c o l u m n o n l y a p p l y i f n o e n t r y i s made f o r t h e window number. PXGl

NAME t o b e s t o r e d : Window r e p r e s e n t a t i o n :

Curve

! Bar

8 Pxlgr. value

% Stat. t e x t

F 1 CURVE WINDOW

F 2 PXLGRA. BAR

F 3 PXLGRA. VALU .OUT

F 4 STATIC TEXT

F 5 STORE DISPLAY

F 6 CONTINUE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

F 1 PREVIOUS WINDOW

F 2 NEXT WINDOW

F 3 CHANGE WINDOW

F 4 DELETE WINDOW

F 5 MOVE WINDOW

F 6 CONTINUE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

Again, you can control the cursor position (i.e., line and column numbers) either by pressing the < ENTER> key and using the cursor control keys, or by entering numbers directly i n the LINE and COLUMN fields. With the WINDOW NO. field, i f several windows are defined in one pixel graphics display, then the windows are numbered i n increasing, consecutive order. The assignment of window numbers is, in contrast t o dynamic displays, entirely dependent on the order that 1 they are generated.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-U 7-01 1

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

To identify a window, you can either enter the window number directly in the WINDOW NO. field, or press the < F1 PREVIOUSWINDOW > and < F2 NEXT WINDOW> function keys in the second part menu. Pressing the < F1 PREVIOUS WINDOW > or < F2 NEXT WINDOW > function keys in the second part menu writes the number of the window positioned either before or after the current cursor position t o the field. Press the < F4 [Link]> function key in the first menu to get t o the PIXEL GRAPHICS TEXT OUTPUT form. Fill in the form as shown:

-> USER DATA P X L G R A .

->

................................................................................
PXGl WINDOW: 01

PXLGRA. D I S P L A Y -> T E X T O U T P U T

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

[Link]:

DRIVE: B PROGRAM: EXAMPLE generate L I N E : 1 0 COLUMN: 1 8

TEXT: EXAMPLE TO COLOR: MAGENTA ENLARGEMENT FACTOR:

4

T h e t e x t i s o u t p u t a t a n ANGLE o f 0 degrees. O n l y m u l t i p l e s of 90 degrees a r e allowed (0 t o 270 degrees) 180 90 + 0 270 F 5

F 6 STORE WINDOW

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

In this form, you can define a static output text. You can output this text in pixel graphics i n 16 sizes and 4 directions, and you may use it t o label other windows or t o generate headings.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

The reference point for pixel graphics text outputs is always in the upper left-hand corner, and is labeled " 0 " i n the following shape:

COM checks, based on the inputs made i n the LINE, COLUMN, ANGLE, and ENLARGEMENT FACTOR fields, and the text length, whether the text exceeds the display screen limits. It does not check for overlapping w i t h other windows. You can make alternative entries i n the COLOR and ANGLE fields by pressing the HELP> function key.

< F7

The COLOR field indicates the color in which the text is output on the C monitor. P The ANGLE field determines the direction i n which the text is output. The pivot of this field is always the first character in the upper left-hand corner. In the ENLARGEMENT FACTORfield, the numbers from 1 t o 16 determine text enlargement i n multiples of 8 X 18 pixels. A pixel is one display element (a characterbased graphics use 8 X 18 pixels). the If you enter no enlargement factor, or " 1 ", text is not enlarged. By pressing the <F6 STORE WINDOW> function key, you store the pixel graphics window i n the pixel graphics display, after a validity check. A t the same time, the program returns t o the PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY form, in which the message WINDOW STORED appears. The area on the CP screen covered by the static text i s marked by a series of " % " symbols.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

To install a second static text, repeat the preceding steps. Input the reference point of the second static text i n the PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY form as follows: LINE: "15" COLUMN: "18" Pressing the < F4 STAT. TEXT> function key brings you once again t o the PlXEL GRAPHICS TEXT OUTPUT form.

-> USER DATA P X L G R A .

->

................................................................................
PXGl WINDOW: 02

PIXELGRA. D I S P L A Y -> T E X T O U T P U T

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526

[Link]:

DRIVE: B PROGRAM: EXAMPLE generate L I N E : 15 COLUMN: 1 8

TEXT : COM 5 2 6 COLOR: MAGENTA ENLARGEMENT FACTOR:

4

T h e t e x t i s o u t p u t a t an ANGLE o f 0 d e g r e e s . Only m u l t i p l e s of 9 0 d e g r e e s a r e a l l o w e d ( 0 t o 270 d e g r e e s )

180

90 + 0 270

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6 STORE WINDOW

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

After storing the second window by pressing the < F6 STORE WINDOW > function key, store the display under the name "PXG1" t o drive C by pressing the < F5 STORE DISPLAY > function key i n the first menu of the PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY form. The message ELEMENT STORED appears. Pressing the back t o the PROGRAM USER DATA form.

<F8 EXIT>

function key brings you

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Chapter S

Generating Displays

[Link]

Description o f the Pixel Graphics Display PXG2

The following paragraphs describe how t o generate pixel graphics display PXG2, consisting of one curve window: In the PROGRAM USER DATA form, enter the name "BACK1 " i n the STATIC DISPLAY field and the name "DYN1" i n the DYNAMIC DISPLAY field or press the < F7 HELP> function key. Now enter the name "PXG2" in the PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY field. Pressing the < F3 PlXEL GRAPHICS> function key i n the PROGRAM USER DATA form P brings up the static display BACK1 and the dynamic display DYN 1 on t h e C screen. To construct the coordinate system of the curve window, you must define certain symbols in the upper part of the symbol set during output (for further information, see the C P description, Chapter 3).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

Curve Window After entering the reference point for the curve window i n the PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY form (i.e., LINE = 5, COLUMN = 50),press the < F1 CURVE > function key t o arrive i n t h e CURVE WINDOW form.

-> USER DATA -> PXLGRA. D I S P L A Y C U R V E W I N D O W

[Link]: PXG2

->
WINDOW: 0 1

................................................................................

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

DRIVE: B PROGRAM: EXAMPLE generate L I N E : 0 5 COLUMN: 5 0 GREATEST SCALE I N T : - 220

WINDOW S I Z E : 26x11 Characters LABELING o f w i n d o w : Tank Temperature o u t p u t OLD VALUE: Y UPDATE RATE: 1 o u t p u t GRID: Y OUTPUT VALUES f e t c h e d f r o m : CPU: 1, DB: 0 2 1 START ADDRESS DW 0 0 0

, DB:
1 M
'

STEP S I Z E : direct 100 o r i n d i r e c t DW

<

I N D I R E C T VALUES a r e f e t c h e d f r o m : CPU: LABELING o f Time a x i s : CURVE NUMBER:

F 1 PROGRAM CURVE

Min 1 F 3

STEP S I Z E : TIME UNIT:

SMALLEST SCALE I N T : direct 20 0 o r i n d i r e c t DW

F 2 PROGRAM LIMITS

F 4

F 5

F 6 STORE WINDOW

F 7 HELP

F 8
EXIT

This form defines a flowing curve diagram i n which a maximum o f six curves can be depicted. After each refresh cycle (i.e., update time) the curves represented in the diagram are shifted t o the left. This shifting is dependent upon the update time and the selected scaling for the curve window.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-07

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

I f you exit t h e fields GRID, ADDRESS, INDIRECT VALUES ARE FETCHED FROM: DB, STEP SIZE DIRECT and INDIRECT DW, SMALLEST SCALE INT. DIRECT and INDIRECT DW, or STEP SIZE OF TIME AXIS by simply pressing the < RETURN > key, or by pressing t h e < FIELD RIGHT> key, then a nonstandard type of cursor control is used. First, the input fields that are located in the coordinate system are processed (with a window size u p t o t h e indirect value address), followed by the y-axis data, and last the time-axis data. If you exit t h e INDIRECTVALUESARE FETCHED FROM: CPU field by pressing the <FIELD RIGHT> or < RETURN> keys without entering any information, then the cursor moves instantly t o t h e STEP SIZE DIRECT field. A t the same time, any contents of the INDIRECT VALUES ARE FETCHED FROM: DB field are erased. If you d o n o t make any entry i n the STEP SIZE DIRECT field, the cursor moves t o the STEP SIZE INDIRECT DW field; if you do, it moves t o the SMALLEST SCALE INT. DIRECT field. The same applies for the SMALLEST SCALE INT. DIRECT field; if you make an entry i n t h e SMALLEST SCALE INT. DIRECT field, t h e cursor jumps t o the LABELING OF STEPSIZE field after you press < RETURN>. Upon exiting t h e STEP SIZE and SMALLEST SCALE INT. fields that are needed for labeling the ordinates, w i t h direct specification o f both values, COM computes and outputs the greatest scale integer. If a t least one value is specified indirectly, the word INDIRECT appears i n t h e GREATESTSCALE INT. field.

Scaling i n X-Direction Time is depicted o n t h e x-axis. The past is represented i n a negative direction on the Xaxis, (i.e., t h e curve moves from right t o left). The present is represented by the farthest point t o t h e right.

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

You determine the total time t o be represented by selecting a scale classification and its associated step size. The total time is calculated from these values. Each tenth scaling mark o n the x-axis is elongated and labelled w i t h t h e value defined by t h e specified step size. Scaling marks are always output in equal intervals (i.e., i n intervals o f eight pixels), regardless o f the window size. Therefore, the number o f scaling marks differs according t o t h e window size (see Table 5- 1).

Scaling in V-Direction

You can read the current measured value a t any given time from t h e y-axis ordinates. In y-direction, scaling marks are output in intervals o f 18 pixels. Each fourth scaling mark is elongated and labelled w i t h the value defined by the specified step size. In addition, the smallest scale integer that the curve can display must be specified. As an example of smallest scale integer and step size specification o n the y-axis, w i t h a selected window size o f 26 X 1 1, according t o Table 5-1, the number o f scaling marks o n t h e y-axis is two. If t h e estimated measured value is between 120 and 180, then you should use the following examples o f scaling: (see over)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Chapter S

Generating Displays

Example 1 : Smallest scale integer 100, step size 50

Example 2: Smallest scale integer 0, step size 100 For the same window size and number of scaling marks, the reading is less accurate in this example.

You can make alternative entries in the WINDOW SIZE, GRID, OLD VALUE, UPDATE RATE, TIME UNIT, and CURVE NUMBER (i.e.,if curves are already set up) fields by pressing the < F7 HELP> function key.
1

Siemens AG C79000-68576-01 7-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

In the GREATEST SCALE INT. field, with direct specification of step size and smallest scale integer, you can calculate and display the greatest scale integer for the specified window size ;otherwise the word INDIRECT appears. If calculation is possible, the following formulas apply: greatest scale integer - smallest scale integer < = 32767 greatest scale integer

< = 32767

If these conditions are not fulfilled, then no greatest scale integer is displayed. The error message Value range not permissible does not appear, however, until you press the F1 >, < F2 >, or < F6 > function keys. If you change the window size, then the greatest scale integer is also updated. With the WINDOW SIZE field, allowed inputs are dependent on the selected cursor position, since COM does not allow you t o store a window that exceeds the video screen limits. If the cursor i s positioned incorrectly when you exit the WINDOW SIZE field or press the <F7> function key, the warning Window not correctly positioned appears. COM does not check for overlapping with other windows. When you select the smallest curve window, remember that you can only represent six curve diagrams on the screen at one time. If you select the largest size, then the curve window covers the entire screen.
NOTE: With a window size of 80 X 22, the window label at the right border overwrites the ordinate value of the scaling when the maximum label length is used.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-017-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Example 1 :Window size 80 columns X 22 lines

0
Curve 1 Head~ng Curve 2 Curve 3 Curve 4 Curve 5 Curve 6

400

-- 300

--

200

-- 100
I

- 60

- 50

- 40

- 30

I
- 20

- 10

0 0S

Example 2: Window size 26 columns X l 1 lines (minimum size)

P U

- 20

D
800 400 0

Curve 1 Headin

Curve 2

- 10

0S

The reference point for a curve window is located in the upper left-hand corner, and is labeled "0" in the figure.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

Window Size Column X Line

80 X 22 80x 1 1

Scaling Marks on X-Axis 6 6 3

3
2

Scaling Marks on Y-Axis

4
2

40 X 22
40x 11
2 6 x 11

2
2

Table 5-1 : Number of Elongated Scaling Marks (labeled) for Various Window Sizes The specified size i n lines and columns refers t o the entire window (i.e., the coordinate system with labels). The size of the coordinate system i n which the curves are represented may be taken from the following table:

Window Size

Table 5-2: Sizes of Coordinate Systems i n Characters and Pixels for Various Window Sizes

SiemensAG C79000-88576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

With the LABELING OF WINDOW field, you can output a heading that functions simultaneously as the ordinate label. The heading is output in the color white. You can enter either "Y" or "Nu in the OLD VALUES field. If you specify "Y", then a complete curve diagram, stored by the controller in a data block, can be output with old measured values. Afterwards, the curve is updated as usual (except with PC updating). The data block layout may be found in the description of the CP expansion board. With the UPDATE RATE field, you can assign cycle times i n which the curve windows are updated, specifically for each curve window. The total monitoring time span is determined by the selected step size on the x-axis, the time unit, and the window size.

Example: Determining the Monitoring Time Span TIME UNIT STEP SIZE WINDOW SIZE
"S" " 10" "80 X 22"

(according t o Table 5-1, there are six scaling marks on the x-axis) Monitoring interval = number of scaling marks X step size = 6 X 10 = 60 S You must coordinate the choice of update rate and desired monitoring time span. If you choose slow updating, then the monitoring time span must be correspondingly long. You should not represent too many curves with a short refresh time on the video screen at the same time, because it may not be possible t o maintain the refresh time.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U7-01 1

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

In exceptional cases, you may select the controller as an alternative. In such a case, no cyclic updating is done by the firmware, and it is left up t o the controller t o decide when t o [Link] collected old values are output with this kind of updating. The shorter the update time with the same monitoring time span, the more vertices the curve has. Example 1: Step size 10, Time Unit S, Update Rate 10 Seconds

Example 2: Step Size 10, Time Unit S, Update Rate 5 Seconds

The GRID field allows you t o read the function values more easily by giving the window a predefined background grid.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

With the STEP SIZE field, you can input the value for the step size on the y-axis either directly i n numbers, or indirectly. With indirect input, you must fill in both the INDIRECT VALUES ARE FETCHED FROM: CPU and DB fields. You must fill i n the CPU field because a controller can have several CPUs. This number indicates which CPU (i.e., 1 - 8) the value is fetched from. in C If you specify " N W the OLD VALUES field, and select P updating, then the CPU, DB, and ADDRESS fields can remain blank. In the DB field, you specify the data block within the prespecified CPU, from which the value is fetched (i.e. 2 - 255). In the ADDRESS field, you must enter the data block address (i.e., 0 - 255). You can find information on the total layout of the data block in the controller in the description of the CP expansion board. In the SMALLEST SCALE INT. field, you can input this value either directly in numbers, or indirectly. With indirect input, you must fill i n both the INDIRECT VALUES ARE FETCHED FROM :CPU and DB fields. The step size you enter i n the STEP SIZE OF TlME AXlS field becomes the value at the first elongated scaling mark on the axis. The step size for the time axis is defined positive, but i s output as negative time when the coordinate axes are output. If you specify an "S" for seconds i n the TIME UNIT field, then only inputs in multiples of ten are allowed i n this field. With the LABELING OF TlME AXlS field, a three-character long text can stand next t o the time axis, which specifies the dimension of the entered values. The entry you make in the CURVE NUMBER field specifies the number of curves t o appear i n a window. There can be a maximum of six curves per curve window. However, you should not assign this many t o one window, as they become increasingly difficult t o differentiate with decreasing size.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

You must define at least one curve per window before it can be stored. Pressing the <F2 PROGRAM LIMITS> function key bringsyou t o the LIMITS form, if you have made the correct inputs i n the SMALLEST SCALE INT. and STEP SIZE fields. In this form, you have a choice between determining upper limit, reference value, and lower limit. You can, but do not have t o specify all of these values.

-> PXLGRA. DISPLAY L I M I T S

->

CURVE WINDOW

->

................................................................................

COROS / C M GRAPH O DEVICE: CP526

DRIVE: B PROGRAM: EXAMPLE [Link]: PXG2 WINDOW: 0 1 g e n e r a t e LINE: 05 COLUMN: 50 The f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s f i x t h e l i m i t s f o r t h e f i l l - i n p a t t e r n changeover i n , DB: t h e window. I n d i r e c t l y s p e c i f i e d v a l u e s a r e f e t c h e d from CPU:

UPPER LIMIT: REF. VALUE: direct 150 or indirect D W direct 100 or indirect D W direct 50 or indirect D W

220

120

LOWER LIMIT:

<
F 1

F 5 F 6 STORE LIMITS F 7 F 8

20

F 2

F 3

F 4

EXIT

This form also shows the greatest and smallest scale integers for direct output. Depending on the window size entered, the other scaling marks are also labeled.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

When you specify a value i n the REFERENCE VALUE field, curves are layered under one another, starting from the reference value line (see also the description of the FILL-IN PATTERN NO. field i n the CURVE form). If no reference value is specified, then layering starts with the smallest scale integer. The UPPER LIMIT and LOWER LlMlTfields specify limit values. If these limits are exceeded, the fill-in type changes t o solid shading; the color remains the same. You can enter values either directly i n numbers, or indirectly. With indirect input, you must fill in the INDIRECT VALUES ARE FETCHED FROM CPU and DB fields i n the CURVE WINDOW form. The following figure is an example of limit value and/or reference value definition:

greatest scale integer upper limit

reference value

lower limit

smallest scale integer Pressing the < F6 STORE LIMITS> function key i n this form stores the Iimit values after a validity check.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

5-75

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The validity check is done according t o the following formula: smallest scale integer < = lower limit < = reference value < = upper limit greatest scale integer The difference between the smallest and the greatest scale integer must not exceed 32767. If one of these values is specified indirectly, the condition is considered fulfilled and the remaining direct values are checked. Then press the <F1 PROGRAM CURVE> function key in the CURVE WINDOW form.

<=

-> PXLGRA. D I S P L A Y C U R V E
[Link]:

->

CURVE WINDOW

->
WINDOW: 0 1

................................................................................
PXGZ

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526

DRIVE: B PROGRAM: EXAMPLE generate L I N E : 0 5 COLUMN: 5 0 220 GREATEST OUTPUT VALUE: direct 220 o r i n d i r e c t DW

Curve N o . :l LABELING o f t h e c u r v e : Tank 1 COLOR: CYAN L I N E TYPE NO.: 1 F I L L - I N PATTERN NO.: 1

- 120

I N D I R E C T VALUES a r e f e t c h e d f r o m : , DB: CPU:

<
F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 DELETE CURVE

- 2 0

SMALLEST OUTPUT VALUE: direct 20 o r indirect DW F 6 STORE CURVE F 7 HELP

F 8

F 5

EXIT

You define the individual curve parameters in the CURVE form

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Using nonstandard cursor control (< RETURN > and <FIELD RIGHT> keys), pass over first the fields within the coordinate system, and then the GREATESTand SMALLEST OUTPUT VALUE fields. With the LABELLING field, you can output a label for each diagram, i n which a text of up t o 10 characters is output i n the corresponding color for each curve. For each window size, a maximum number o f texts supportable by the firmware is determined. For the smallest window, the maximum is two; for the next larger window, three. If there are more curves than texts, then the specified texts refer t o the curves defined first. If you need further texts, you must decide whether t o insert these in the static display as segments or output them as pixel graphics texts. With the COLOR field, you can display curves in all colors that are also available in the character graphics (red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow, and white). With the FILL-IN PATTERN NO. field, when curves are layered, each point of the curve is joined t o the point that is vertically below or above it on the reference value line. In the LINE TYPE NO. field, line type 1 corresponds t o a solid line. With fill i n pattern 2, layering i s full. You can find further alternatives for fill in patterns and line types in the Planning Guide COM GRAPH (Chapter4). With the GREATEST OUTPUT VALUE and SMALLEST OUTPUT VALUE fields, since measured values for each of the six curves can have different value ranges, you can define curve-specific values, such as the smallest and the greatest output value, for each curve separately. When the curve is output, each measured value, reference value, and lower and upper limit is recalculated t o the full diagram height.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

Again, the following condition must be fulfilled: smallest output value < = greatest output value greatest output value -smallest output value < = 32767 Example: You might want t o represent the time waveform of the primary voltage (-220 t o + 220 Veff) and the secondary voltage (-1 2 t o + 12 Veff) of a transformer. If no conversion were done, you would not be able t o read the value for the secondary voltage, since the curve would only deviate slightly from the x-axis. Therefore, you should select a greatest output value o f + 320 and a smallest output value of -320 for the primary voltage wave, and a greatest output value of + 17 and a smallest output value of -1 7 for the secondary voltage.

- Max
= 17

With indirect input, you must fill in the CPU NO. and DB fields i n the CURVE WINDOW form. Store this curve by pressing the < F6 STORE CURVE > function key. In the CURVE WINDOW form, enter "2" for the curve number and press the < F1 > function key again. Now enter the data as shown in the form on the following page.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C? 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

-> PXLGRA. DISPLAY C U R V E

[Link]:

->

CURVE WINDOW

->
WINDOW: 0 1

................................................................................
PXG2

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

DRIVE: B PROGRAM: EXAMPLE generate L I N E : 0 5 COLUMN: 5 0

C u r v e No.:2 LABELING o f t h e c u r v e : T a n k 2 COLOR: RED L I N E TYPE NO. : 1 F I L L - I N PATTERN NO. : 2 I N D I R E C T VALUES a r e f e t c h e d f r o m : CPU: , DB:

220

GREATEST OUTPUT VALUE: direct 220 o r i n d i r e c t DW

<
F 1
F 2

F 3
F 4 DELETE CURVE

20

SMALLEST OUTPUT VALUE: direct 20 o r indirect DW F 6 STORE CURVE F 7 HELP

F 8

F 5

EXIT

Store curve 2 by pressing the < F6 STORE CURVE > function key in this form. Then store i t in the window by pressing the < F6 STORE WINDOW > function key i n the CURVE WINDOW form. On the CP screen, the area covered by the curve window is marked by a series of " *" symbols.

[Link]

Bar Windows

Bars are a special representation form for numeric values. When a lower or upper limit value is reached, the fill-in pattern type for the exceeded part becomes automatically full, and the color changes t o the selected signal color. You can, but do not have to, define such upper or lower limit values.

Otherwise, you can freelyselea the fill-in type for values within the allowed measuredvalue range (i.e., between upper and lower value limits).

SiemensAG C79000-68576-0 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

Using C cursor control, place the cursor on the first blank space i n the upper left-hand P corner inside tank 1. Then press the < F2 PXL GRA. BAR> function key. You can make alternative entries i n the BAR TYPE, BAR LENGTH, COLOR, AXIS, and UPDATE RATE fields by pressing the < F7 HELP> function key. First process the BAR TYPE, BAR LENGTH, BAR WIDTH, COLOR, PATTERN NO., and AXIS fields using the special cursor control (i.e., <FIELD RIGHT> and <RETURN>) keys, then assign the ordinates, and last the output value addresses.

The BAR TYPE Field The following figure is an example of a vertical bar diagram:

greatest scale integer upper limit

+
+

reference value

lower limit

smallest scale integer

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Example of a horizontal bar diagram:

I
I

I
l

+
sm- sc. int-

gr. sc. int. low. lim.

ref. val.

up. lim.

The reference point of the bar is located i n the upper left-hand corner of the window and is labelled "0". With the GREATEST SCALE INT. field, COM calculates and outputs the greatest scale integer according t o window size (if the smallest scale integer isspecified directly) and step size. If you specify either one of the values indirectly, then INDIRECT is output in this field.

The BAR LENGTH Field

The entry made i n this field depends on the bar type. Either manually or with the <F7 HELP> function key, you can enter the lengths 4,8,12, l6,or 20 for a vertical bar, and the lengths 10,20,30,40, or 50 for a horizontal bar.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

Vertical Bar

Horizontal Bar

4 characters
8 characters

10 characters 20 characters 30 characters 40 characters 50 characters

12 characters 16 characters 20 characters

Table 5-3: Maximum Span (distance between greatest and smallest scale integer)

Bar Length

Vertical Bar

Horizontal Bar
1

410 1 8 20 1
1 2/30
1 6/40

1
2

3 4
5

4 5

20150

Table 5-4: Number of Elongated Scaling Marks (labeled) for Various Bar Lengths

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27 7-07

Chapter S

Generating Displays

With the BAR WIDTH field, the input depends on the inputs i n the BAR LENGTH and BAR TYPE fields, and on the position of the bar on the C screen. COM does not check for P overlapping w i t h other windows. With the AXIS OUTPUT field, the firmware generates an associated axis with corresponding scaling. If you enter " Y " i n this field, the axis is output in white. However, you must take this into account for positioning as this causes the bar dimensions t o be enlarged and the software does not take this into account when visualizing the bar. In the UPDATE RATE field, you assign a rate at which the bar can be updated in cyclic time intervals (i.e., the length of the bar is adjusted with every refresh cycle).
In the STEP SIZE field, you can enter either a direct or indirect value. With indirect input, you must fill i n the INDIRECT VALUESARE FETCHED FROM CPU and DB fields.

In the SMALLEST SCALE INT. field, you can specify the smallest scale integer either directly or indirectly. With indirect input, you must fill in the INDIRECTVALUESARE FETCHED FROM CPU and DB fields. Again, the following formula applies: greatest scale integer < = 32767 greatest scale integer - smallest scale integer

< = 32767

For information on all other input fields, see the CURVE WINDOW form and the CURVE form. Pressing the < F2 PROGRAM LIMITS> function key brings you t o the LIMITS form, i n which you can define the upper limit, reference value, and lower limit. The COLOR field i n the LIMITS form indicates the color i n which the part of the bar that exceeds the limits is displayed.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-017-01

Generating Displays

Chapter S

The REFERENCE VALUE field i n the LIMITS form assigns a value t o a reference line for bar output. The bar is drawn starting from the reference line; layering also starts at this line. If no reference value is specified, layering starts at the lower border o f the window. The specified values for smallest and greatest scale integer, upper limit, and reference value must fulfil1 the following condition: sm. scale int. < = lower limit < = ref. val. < = up. limit < = gr. scale int. After the bar window i s stored, the area covered by the bar window on the screen is marked by a series of " !" symbols.

[Link]

Pixel Graphics Value Output

Use pixel graphics value output t o define dynamic texts in the "PIXEL GRAPHIC" mode. By enlarging the value, you can read i t from greater distances. Place the C cursor on the spot where you want t o place a pixel graphics value output P field and press the <F3 PlXEL GRA. VALU. OUT> function key. You can determine length, color, size, and direction of the value i n this form. In contrast t o dynamic value outputs, these values cannot be converted by specifying gain and offset. You can make alternative inputs in the UPDATE RATE, ADDRESS, FORMAT, COLOR, and ANGLE fields by pressing the <F7 HELP> function key. The UPDATE RATE field specifies the cyclic time interval i n which the output field is updated. The reference point for pixel graphics value output is located i n the upper left-hand corner and is labelled "0" in the folllowing figure:

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

VALUE OUTPUT

For the FORMAT field, you can find all possible formats for value representation i n the Planning Guide COM GRAPH (Chapter 4). The number o f character positions depends on the format. COM checks whether the window exceeds the limits of the screen. Avoid exceeding the limits when you choose the inputs in the LINE, COLUMN, ANGLE, and ENLARGEMENT fields, as well as the number of character positions. With the ANGLE field, the pivot of the output field is always the first character in the upper left-hand corner. Pressing the < F6 STORE WINDOW > function key incorporates the pixel graphics window into the pixel graphics display, after a validity check. A t the same time, the screen area covered by the pixel graphics value is marked by a series of "8" symbols. To delete a window, press the < F1 > and <F2> function keys i n the second part menu of the PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY form t o set the number of the window (you can also enter the window number directly in the WINDOW field). When you press the < F4 DELETE WINDOW> function key, the window is deleted, after an acknowledgment. There are three ways t o identify a window for repositioning:
1.

Place the CP cursor on the reference point of the window t o be repositioned. Enter the number of the window t o be repositioned in the WINDOW field.

2.

3. Enter the coordinates of the window t o be repositioned i n the LINE and COLUMN
fields.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

If you press the < F5 MOVE WINDOW > function key i n the second part menu, the message FIELD/WINDOW COUPLED, USE F5 TO STORE!appears. A t the same time, the window is erased from the C screen. P Place the C cursor at the desired position (either by pressing the <ENTER> key and P using the arrow keys, or by entering the coordinates of the new reference point i n the LINE and COLUMN fields). When you press the < F5 MOVE WINDOW> function key again, the message FIELD/WINWW STORED is displayed and the window appears at its new position on the C screen. P
NOTE: Remember that COM does not check whether a window exceeds the limits of the video screen when repositioning.

5.4.6 [Link]

Functions General

Functions are divided into commands and P job orders. C You initiate commands by entering them on the process keyboard (either by pressing a function key that has been assigned the particular function, or by entering the command name directly). The program initiates P job orders depending on the status of a flag bit that corresponds C t o the name of the P job order. C Commands and PC job orders assist i n data exchange between the programmable controller and the CP 526, as well as in visualization of process data. Although messages are not actually functions, message programming i s also discussed i n this chapter since you can only branch t o the PROGRAM MESSAGE form from the FUNCTION form.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

The following types of commands are available:

Display output command - outputs the associated process display on the CP screen Function key command - assigns command names or cursor movements t o function keys Value input command - allows entering of new setpoint values for process variables with the process keyboard Value output command - displays values in process variables on the right side of the command line Set bit or reset bit command - sets or resets a flag bit Status display command - outputs a text on the right side of the command line, depending on the status of a flag bit Shape output command - outputs a shape at any desired position on the screen, depending on the status of a flag bit. Date input or time input command - enables date and time t o be input in the command line Date output or time output command - loads the parameterized values for date and time into the CP clock block Message display command - outputs all messages that have arrived. Note the triple meaning of the term "message" in COM (see Planning Guide, Appendix B)

Siemens AG C79000-885764217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The following types of job orders are available:

Display output job order - outputs a process display on the screen, depending on the status of a flag bit that identifies the P job order C Date output and time output job order - fetches date and time from the controller, triggered by an interprocessor communication flag bit (same as the name o f the P C job order), and loads them into the C clock block P Pixel graphics background updating job order - outputs old values of curves, triggered by the status of an interprocessor communication flag bit (i.e., name of the P P job order), as long as the associated pixel graphics display is visible on the C C screen. If the pixel graphics display is not visible on the screen, then COM ignores this job order.

The program EXAMPLE consists of the following functions:

Display output commands START and DISP1 Set bit commands SET1 and SET2 Reset bit commands RESET1 and RESET2 Value input command VALUE = Time input command TIME = Message display command MESSAGE DISPLAY Message text Value output command VAL-OUTP.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

[Link]

Value Input Command

This section explains how to generate the value input command named VALUE =, starting from the FUNCTION form.

->

................................................................................
DRIVE: B FUNCTION NAME: VALUE = "COMMAND": JOB NUMBER:

SELECTION -> USER DATA F U N C T I O N

->

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

I n i t i a t e a CP526 f u n c t i o n b y e n t e r i n g a command name i n t h e command l i n e . The command name m u s t n o t b e a f l a g name. I n p u t commands m u s t b e ended w i t h " = " .

"PC JOB" :

I n i t i a t e a CP526 f u n c t i o n b y s e t t i n g an IPC f l a g b i t . The name o f t h e PC j o b m u s t b e a f l a g name. F l a g name: F ( b y t e ) . ( b i t ) b y t e 0 - 255 b i t 0

F 1 DISP .OUTP COMMAND

F 2 FCT COMMAND

F 3 VALUE INPUT

F 4 VALUE OUTPUT

F 5 SHAPE OUTPUT

F 6 CONTINUE

F 7 HELP

F 8

EXIT

F 1 [Link] JOB

F 2 PC DATE/ TIME

F 3

MESSAGES

F 4 PXLGRA. [Link]

F 5 PRINT COMMANDS

F 6 CONTINUE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT
2

F 1 ENTER DATE

F 2 ENTER TIME

F 3 DISPLAY DATE/TIME

F 4 S/R B I T COMMAND

F 5 STATUS DISPLAY

F 6 CONTINUE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

Siemens AG C/9000-68576-C2 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

With the FUNCTION NAME field, the name of a value input command must end (as w i t h all input commands) with an " = " symbol as the last character. Names of output commands may not contain any " = " symbols. You may find permissible formats of all other commands in the Planning Guide (Chapter 4). The name of P job orders must designate an interprocessor communication flag bit. C An address range of F (0-255).(0-7) allows a possible 2048 interprocessor communication flag bits. In the JOB ORDER NUMBER field, specifying a job order number is optional (except w i t h value input commands, where it is not permitted). If you specify a job order number greater than zero, then the controller can trigger the function by sending this number t o P C 526 (for information on the send direct job order, see the C description, Chapter 3). If P you do not specify a job order number, or i f i t is equal t o zero, then this function can only be triggered by inputs on the process keyboard. You cannot assign a job order number for value inputs, as a value input command must always be triggered via the process keyboard t o avoid unwanted process status changes (e.g., turning on a motor). If you try t o change the job order number of a function that is already stored, COM requests an acknowledgment to the prompt CHANGE JOB NO. -ALTHOUGH OLD AND NEW NO. DIFFERENT? If you respond in the negative, the old job order number remains the same. You can assign job orders the numbers 0 t o 223,254, and 255. You can enter the name "HELP" i n the FUNCTION NAME field, as long as other functions already exist under the specified program name.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-V 17-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Summary: You can define the following types of functions as P job orders. Each name must be a C flag:
m m m m

Display output Date output Time output Pixel graphics background updating

While all other types of commands can also be triggered by the controller, a send direct job order is required. In this case, the name may not be a flag, and you must specify the job order number. After you fill in the FUNCTION form, pressthe <F3 VALUE INPUT> function key in the first part menu to get t o the VALUE INPUT COMMAND form.

-> USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> V A L U E I N P U T C O M M A N D

NAME: VALUE= t o be s t o r e d : VALUE=

................................................................................
DRIVE: B JOB No. : JOB No. : 5.0.

COROS / C M GRAPH O DEVICE: CP526

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

NAME

I n p u t i s s t o r e d i n CPU No. 1, DB 20 f r o m ADDRESS D W 0. The i n p u t i s made i n 16BIT FXP FORMAT w i t h t h e CHAR. POSITIONS The v a l u e a c t u a l l y s t o r e d i s c a l c u l a t e d f r o m VALUE=(INPUT - (0 V 1) 1 ( l v L i m i t v a l u e s : UPPER LOWER LIMIT: LIMIT: direct direct lOOOOor i n d i r e c t Oor i n d i r e c t

I n d i r e c t l y s p e c i f i e d l i m i t v a l u e s and c o n v e r s i o n f a c t o r s r e s i d e i n t h e i n p u t DB, i n d i r e c t l i m i t v a l u e s use t h e same t y p e o f memory access as t h e i n p u t v a l u e .

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4 DELETE

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

STORE

HELP

EXIT

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter S

You can enter the name "HELP" in the NAME TO BE STORED field, as long as functions exist under the specified program name and in the ADDRESS and FORMAT fields. For the NAME TO STORE field, the entry is taken from the FUNCTION NAME field i n the FUNCTION form. If you want t o store the function under a different name than the one entered i n the FUNCTION form, you can change the name i n this field. For names of commands or P job orders, the same requirements apply. C In the JOB NO. field, you can also change the job order number (with the exception of a value input command). If a function already exists under the specified name with a different job order number, COM requests an acknowledgment t o the prompt CHANGE JOB NO. -ALTHOUGH OLD AND NEW NO. DIFFERENT? before storing. In the INPUT IS STORED IN CPU NO., DB, and ADDRESS fields, you determine in which CPU and controller data block the value will be stored. Every input value can be converted and checked against limits before it reaches the process. You can specify the values for conversion or limit value check either directly or indirectly. With indirect specification, the control program takes over the responsibility of producing correct data (see also Dynamic Displays Value Input Field). Pressing the C F6 STORE > function key i n the VALUE INPUT COMMAND form stores the command VALUE = after the input data i s checked. If COM finds no input errors, then the message ELEMENT STORED appears. Use the < F4 DELETE> function key in this form t o delete a function that is already stored on the data medium.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

After pressing the <F4> function key, the prompt DELETE ELEMENT? appears.

If you respond affirmatively by pressing the < F1 YES> function key, then the value input command VALUE = is deleted from the data medium.
When you delete a function, you do not delete the form, so you only have t o press the <F6 STORE> function key once more t o regeneratethe function VALUE = . After exiting the form by pressing the FUNCTION form.

< F8 EXIT>

function key, you again enter the

[Link]

Value Output Command

With the aid of this command the content of tank 1 is displayed i n the message text of the command line.

<F4 VAL-OUTP.> in the first menu of the FUNCTION screen form takes you into the [Link]. screen form.
The tank content is fetched from CPU 1, DB20, DFO, has five places and is on type 16 bit FPT. An accompanying text t o the tank content can be input in the TEXT column. This text is displayed t o the right of the output value.

Siemens AG C79000-B857642 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

[Link]

Time Input Command

This command allows you t o input the time i n the command line via the process keyboard. Enter the name "TIME = " in the FUNCTION NAME field and press the < F2 INPUTTIME> function key in the third part menu of the FUNCTION form t o branch t o the TlME INPUT COMMAND form. The order that you enter H, M, and S is random. You can enter them manually or by pressingthe < F7 HELP > function key. Since the fields of this form are already preassigned with "H M S," you can store the command immediately by pressing the < F6 STORE > function key. You can select the separating characters for time and date in the CP 526 PARAM. ASSIGNMENT form (the U.S. standard is ":"for time and " for date). I " The input on the process keyboard must then use the separating characters you have entered. If you give the time input command the format HH:MM:SS, then your time entry must be, for example, 22: 59:30.

[Link]

Set Bit and Reset Bit Commands

The following pages describe how t o generate the set bit command SETI. Pressing the < F SIR COMMAND> function key i n the third part menu of the FUNCTlON 4 form brings you t o the SIR BIT COMMAND form. Set bit commands set a flag bit and reset bit commands reset a flag. With this command, you can make changes i n the process status (e.g., opening and closing valves.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-0 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

Fill in the form as shown:

-> USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> S / R B I T C O M M A N D

NAME: S E T 1 t o b e s t o r e d : SET1

................................................................................
DRIVE: B JOB No. : 0 0 0 JOB No. : 0 0 0

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

NAME

FLAG B I T : SET / RESET :

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4 DELETE

F 5

F 6 STORE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

You can make entries in the NAME TO BE STORED and SETIRESETfields with the HELP> function key.

< F7

For the NAME TO BE STORED or JOB NO. fields, the previously mentioned requirements applyIn the FLAG BIT field, enter the number o f the interprocessor communication flag bit t o be set. For the SET/ RESET field, entering the letter "S" causes flag 20.0 t o be set when you enter "SET1 " i n the command line. After filling i n the form, store the set bit command by pressing the <F6 STORE> function key. Now input the name of the associated reset command i n the NAME TO B E STORED field, and change the inputs as shown i n the following form:

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

-> USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> S / R B I T C O M M A N D

NAME: SET1 t o be s t o r e d : RESET1

................................................................................
DRIVE: B JOB N o . : 000 JOB N o . : 000

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE : CP526

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

NAME

FLAG B I T : SET / RESET :

20.0
R

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4 DELETE

F 5

F 6
STORE

F 7
HELP

F 8 EXIT

After storing the reset command, generate the set bit and reset bit commands for flag 20.1 according t o the same process. Enter for these the names "SETZ" or "RESETZ" in the NAME TO BE STORED fields. Store the command and return t o the FUNCTION form by pressing the < F8 EXIT> function key. The name SET1 remains in the FUNCTION NAME field. If you try t o translate this command back and press any function key other than the one associated with its type, the error message ERROR 524: Command is of type :appears. In addition, the actual command type is shown (e.g., a set bit command).

O l when you press the < F4 SIR COMMAND> function key does the program branch t o ny the SIR BIT COMMAND form.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-1217-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

[Link]

Display Output Commands

Display Output Command START in the FUNCTION NAME field i n the FUNCTION form, enter the command name "START". Then press the < F1 CMD DlSP OUTPUT> function key t o branch t o the DISPLAY OUTPUT COMMAND form. A display output command helps you determine which static displays, dynamic displays, or pixel graphics displays should make up a process display. Entering the display output command on the process keyboard brings up the associated process display on the C P screen (with the exception of the display output command START). A function key menu is output for each processdisplay, i n the bottom lines on the C P monitor. You can label each function key with a single line of text. You may only use the command name START t o designate one display output command. This command always exists on the C 526 and is automatically carried out when you start P up the CP 526 i.e. the display behind the START function is shown. The standard command START corresponds t o a blank display. This means that you do not have t o enter this command name on the process keyboard for the display t o be brought up on the CP screen. You must always designate a static display with a display output command. You can designate a dynamic or pixel graphics display, but this is not necessary. If a display consists of only one pixel graphics andlor dynamic display, as in this case you must still designate a blank static display (i.e., BACKO). In addition, you can redefine the message and command Iines and assign functions t o the function keys on the process keyboard.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

Fill in the form as shown:

-> USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> D I S P L A Y O U T P U T

NAME: START t o b e s t o r e d : START

................................................................................
DRIVE: B JOB N o . : 0 0 0 JOB N o . : 0 0 0

C O M M A N D

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

NAME

NAME [Link]: BACK0 NAME DYN . D I S P : NAME OF PIXELGRAPHICS D I S P L A Y : P X G l O n l y w h e n r e - s p e c i f y i n g command a n d m e s s a g e l i n e : MESSAGE L I N E : COMMAND L I N E : MESSAGE L I N E : BACKGROUND COLOR: COMMAND L I N E : BACKGROUND COLOR: FOREGROUND COLOR: FOREGROUND COLOR: FLASHING: FLASHING:

F 1 DEFINE FCT. KEY

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

DELETE

STORE

HELP

EXIT

In the NAME [Link], NAME [Link], and NAME OF PlXEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY fields, press the < F7 HELP> function key t o enter the names of the elements that will make up the process display (if they are already present on the data medium). If you try t o store element names that are not yet present under the designated program name on the data medium, COM displaysthe message S t o r e , a l t h o u g h s t a t . , d y n . , p i x e l graph. d i s p . d o e s n o t e x i s t ? If you need t o redefine command and message lines, you must fill i n all three fields for that line. You can make entries i n the FOREGROUND COLOR, BACKGROUND COLOR, and FLASHING fieldswith the <F7 HELP> function key. If you need t o assign com mand names t o the function keys on the process operation keyboard, or assign cursor jumps t o input fields, you must do this i n the FCT-KEY COMMAND form (to get t o this form, press the < F1 DEFINE FCT-KEY> function key).

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

You can define the <F1 > t o < F8> function keys in this form. To define the < F9> t o < F16> function keys, pressthe <F1 PAGE FORWARDS> function key in the FCT. KEY COMMAND form t o branch t o the next form. If you need more than 16 function keys, assign a display output command, which does not output any display but just defines function keys, t o one of the function keys from the function key menu.
It is also possible t o generate a function key command.

->
................................................................................
DRIVE: B NAME FCT 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: NAME: START t o b e s t o r e d : START COMMAND DISPl TEXT F1 JOB N o . : JOB N o . : B-COLOR WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE 000 000 LINE COLUMN AC K N USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> ( D I S P CMD.->) F C T . K E Y C O M M A N D COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

F-COLOR BLACK BLACK BLACK B LAC K BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK

D e l e t e t h e f u n c t i o n key assignment: Y

F 1 PAGE FORWARDS

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6 STORE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

DELETE

In this example, you assign names t o the function keys. You do not fill i n the LINE and COLUMN fields.

In the COMMAND field, you enter the name of the command t o be carried out when you press the function key on the process keyboard. The function name may not be the same as a PC job order.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

If this command already exists under the specified program name, then you can enter it by pressing the < F7 HELP> function key. In the TEXT field, you enter the text that labels the function key in the process display. If there is no entry, then the command name is automatically used for labeling (however, only the first eight charactersare used this way). The B-COLOR and F-COLOR fields specify the background and foreground colors, respectively, o f the function keys. If you want t o output the function keys and their labels P in a color different from the one specified i n the C parameters, then enter the new colors i n these fields (i.e., by entering the text or by pressing the <F7 HELP> function key). These fields are preassigned with the colors that you specified for the function keys i n the C 526 PARAM. ASSIGNMENT form. P When you enter a "Y" i n the ACK (acknowledgment) field (which may be done by pressing the < F7 HELP> key), then after pressing the function key on the process keyboard, you must also press the <RETURN > key. If you enter "Y" in the DELETE THE FUNCTION KEY ASSlGNMENTfield, the existing key assignments are deleted before new function key assignments are made. The existing function key assignments are deleted from the CP screen. If you enter " N", the existing function key assignments are only deleted with function key commands, but not w i t h display output commands. In the program EXAMPLE, you only need t o program the <F1 > function key (it is not necessary t o branch t o the next form t o assign the < F9> t o < F16> function keys). However, the label for the < F1 > function key should have t w o lines. To assign the second line, press the < F1 PAGE FORWARDS> function key in this form t o get t o the form for defining the < F9 > t o < F 16> function keys.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-017-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

-> USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> ( D I S P CMD.->) F C T . K E Y C O M M A N D

NAME: START t o be s t o r e d : START COMMAND DUMMY TEXT TANK

................................................................................
DRIVE: B JOB N o . : JOB No.: B-COLOR WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE 000 000 LINE

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

NAME FCT 09: 10: 11: 1 2:

13 : 14 : 15: 16:

F-COLOR BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK

COLUMN

AC K N

D e l e t e t h e f u n c t i o n key a s s i g n m e n t : Y

F 1 PAGE BACKWARDS

F 2

F 3

F 4 DELETE

F 5

F 6 STORE

F 7

F 8 EXIT

HELP

In the COMMAND field, you enter a command name that does not yet exist on the data medium. In the TEXT field, you enter the lower label line of the function key. After completely filling in the form, press the < F6 STORE > function key. COM then checks the inputs in both of the function key definition forms. A t the same time, the program returns t o the DISPLAY OUTPUT COMMAND form. Now store the display output command by pressing the <F6 STORE > function key. COM requests an acknowledgment t o the prompt STORE, ALTHOUGH CMD. ENTRY OR DIRECT VALUE ENTRY?, since the specified command DUMMY does not yet exist under this program name. If you respond by pressing C F1 YES>;the display output command i s stored.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

If you initiate the function DUMMY, that does not yet exist on the CP 526, by pressing the < F9> function key during operation, then the CP error message Command does not exist appears in the command line.

Display Output Command DlSPl Now generate the display output command DlSPl according t o the steps used t o define the display output command START. The process display DISPI should consist o f the static background display BACK1, the dynamic display DYN1, and the pixel graphics display PXGZ.

-> USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> D I S P L A Y O U T P U T

NAME: D I S P l to b e stored: DISPl

................................................................................
DRIVE: B JOB N o . : 000 JOB No.: 000 DYNl

C O M M A N D

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

NAME

NAME STAT D I S P : BACK1 NAME [Link]: NAME OF PIXELGRAPHICS D I S P L A Y : PXGZ

O n l y w h e n r e - s p e c i f y i n g command a n d m e s s a g e l i n e : MESSAGE L I N E : COMMAND L I N E : MESSAGE L I N E : BACKGROUND COLOR: COMMAND L I N E : BACKGROUND COLOR : FOREGROUND COLOR: FOREGROUND COLOR: FLASHING: FLASHING:

F 1 DEFINE FCT. KEY

F 2

F 3

F 4 DELETE

F 5

F 6 STORE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

Siemens AG C79000-68576-0 17-01

Chapter S

Generating Displays

The following form shows the assignments for the

< F1 > t o < F8> function keys:

................................................................................
DRIVE: B NAME FCT 01: 02: 03: 04: 05: 06: 07: 08: NAME: D I S P l t o be s t o r e d : D I S P l COMMAND RESET1 SET1 RESET2 SET2 VALUE= TIME= MESSAGE D I S P START TEXT F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 JOB No.: JOB No.: 8-COLOR WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE 000 000 LINE COLUMN

-> USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> ( D I S P CMD.->) F C T . K E Y C O M M A N D

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

F-COLOR B LAC K BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK B LAC K BLACK BLACK

AC K N N N N Y Y N

D e l e t e t h e f u n c t i o n key a s s i g n m e n t : Y

F 1 PAGE FORWARDS

F 2

F 3

F 4 DELETE

F 5

F 6 STORE

F 7

F 8 EXIT

HELP

NOTE: Take special care when assigning an input command t o a function key.

When you enter "Nu in the ACK field and then press the <F7> function key, the command is initiated immediately, without any pause t o allow you t o enterthe value i n the command line. When you enter "Y" in the ACK field, the CP cursor appears t o the right of the " = " symbol in the command line. You can input the desired value on the process keyboard and then press the <RETURN > key. To initiate the value input command without an acknowledgment, you can enter the desired value directly after the " = " symbol in the COMMAND NAME field.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-017-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

For example:
05:

"VALUE = 100

F7 WHITE BLACK Y "

You should also assign a two-line function key label in this process display. Select the screen for assigning the < F9> to < F16> function keys by pressing the < F1 PAGE FORWARDS> function key in this form.

->

................................................................................
DRIVE: B NAME FCT 09: 10: 1 : 1 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: NAME: START t o b e s t o r e d : START COMMAND DUMMY DUMMY DUMMY DUMMY DUMMY DUMMY DUMMY DUMMY TEXT VENT1 C VENT1 0 VENT2 C VENT2 0 VALU I N P TIME I N P MESSAGE EXIT JOB NO.: 0 0 0 JOB No. : 0 0 0 B-COLOR WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE F-COLOR BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK LINE

USER DATA -> FUNCTION -> ( D I S P CMD.->) F C T . K E Y C O M M A N D

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

COLUMN

ACK N N N N N N N N

D e l e t e t h e f u n c t i o n key a s s i g n m e n t : Y

F 1 PAGE FORWARDS

F 2

F 3

F 4 DELETE

F 5

F 6 STORE

F 7 HELP

F 8

EXIT

It is also possible to assign cursor jumps t o function keys.

Then, when you press the assigned function key on the process keyboard, the CP cursor jumps t o an input field in the dynamic display.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

The LINE and COLUMN fields mark the position of the dynamic VALUE INPUT field on the C screen. P The COMMAND field can remain blank. With the ACK field you can control whether an entry made in the field is completed immediately after it is input (by entering " N"), or whether additional inputs can be made (by entering " Y ").

[Link]

Message Display Command

To define a message display command, you must enter the name "MESSAGE DISP" in the FUNCTION NAME field in the FUNCTION form. The name of the message display command must follow the general name conventions for command names. Then branch t o the MESSAGES form by pressing the < F3 MESSAGES> function key i n the second part menu of the FUNCTION form (for a definition of the term "messages", see Planning Guide, Appendix B).

SiemensAG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The MESSAGES form has the following preassignments:

r

-> USER DATA -> FUNCTION M E S S A G E S

-> COROS / C M O DEVICE: ................................................................................

DRIVE: B

GRAPH CP526

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE Job number: 000

Name o f t h e message d i s p l a y command: MESSAGE DISP

The command name s h o u l d o n l y b e s p e c i f i e d when d e f i n i n g a message d i s p l a y . When programmming t h e message t e x t , t h e message number can be e n t e r e d i n t h e f o l l o w i n g screen form.

F 1 PROGR M G DISP S

F 2

F 3 PROGR MESSAGE

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8
EXIT

Press the < F1 PROGR. MSC. DlSP> function key in this form t o branch t o the MESSAGE DISPLAY form. The command MESSAGE DISPLAY displays all messages that have arrived from the controller. You can initiate this function by entering the command name on the process keyboard, by pressing the function key that is assigned this command name, or by P job C order directly from the controller (e.g., for important messages).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

-> FUNCTION -> MESSAGES -> M E S S A G E D I S P L A Y

NAME DATE GROUP all 1 2 3
4

................................................................................
NAME: MESSAGE DISP t o be s t o r e d : MESSAGE DISP : M D Y TIME : H M S DRIVE: B JOB No.: 000 JOB No.: 000

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: CP526

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

TITLE o f message d i s p l a y TITLE FOR GROUP 1

B-COLOR BLACK WHITE BLACK BLACK BLACK

F-COLOR WHITE RED WHITE WHITE WHITE

F N N N N N

ATTRIBUTES o f t h e a r e a o f a message marked w i t h * : BACKGROUND FOREGROUND FLASHING Acknowledgement s t a t u s MAGENTA Y Message a r r i v e d , b u t n o t acknowledged WHITE BLACK Y Message a r r i v e d , gone and n o t acknowledged WHITE MAGENTA N Message a r r i v e d , and acknowledged WHITE Y Message a r r i v e d , acknowledged and gone GREEN WHITE F 1 DEFINE FCT. KEY F 2 F 3 F 4 DELETE M MSG .C D F 5
F 6 STORE [Link]
F 7

F 8 EXIT

HELP

The fields before the TITLE field are preassigned with the date and time formats; you can change these entries by pressing the < F7 HELP> function key. The order of date and time in the message heading is already determined. However, you can rearrange the M, D, and Y fields for the date, as well as the H, M, and S fields for the time. In the TITLE field, depending on the message group, you can specify the text of the title for the message display. In the B-COLOR, F-COLOR, and F fields, you can enter the attributes for each heading separately.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

With t h e BACKGROUND, FOREGROUND, and FLASHING fields, you can assign one attribute for t h e entire message display, for each o f the four acknowledgment conditions. The attribute changes w i t h the individual messages according t o t h e acknowledgment condition, a t those locations that are marked above t h e text with random characters (no blank characters), i n t h e PROGRAM MESSAGE form.
By pressing t h e <F1 DEFINE FCT. KEY > function key i n the MESSAGE DISPLAY form, you branch t o the DEFINE FUNCTION KEYS form for messages.

-> FUNCTIONS D E F I N E
NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 12 13 14 15 16

->

................................................................................
TEXT tCursort B-COLOR WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE F-COLOR BLACK BLACK BLAC K B LAC K BLACK BLAC K BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLAC K BLACK BLAC K BLAC K F 4

MESSAGE DISPLAY -> F U N C T I O N K E Y S

COROS / C M GRAPH O DEVICE: CP526

DRIVE: B PROGRAM: EXAMPLE MEANINGCursor up S c r o l l messages backward Page messages backward D i s p l a y s t a r t i n g w i t h f i r s t message Acknowledge a l l d i s p l a y e d messages D i s p l a y messages from group 1 D i s p l a y messages from group 3 D i s p l a y messages from a l l groups Cursor down S c r o l l messages f o r w a r d Page messages f o r w a r d D i s p l a y l a s t message Acknowledge message a t c u r s o r D i s p l a y messages f rom group 2 D i s p l a y messages from group 4 EXIT
F 5 F 6 F 7

t ttf
\

Q+++
GROUP 1 GROUP 3 G r 1....4 J Cursor 1

4 $14

Q+
GROUP 2 GROUP 4 END F 1
F 2

r(

F 3

F 8 EXIT

SAVE

HELP

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

In the TEXT field, you can either input a text for labeling the function keys, or you can use the standard texts. You can assign the standard texts t o any function key. Make sure that the meaning of the standard text and the entry in the MEANING field agree. If you leave the field blank, then the standard label is assigned-Themessage display with the function key labels is displayed when you enter the message display command on the process keyboard, or when i t is output by the controller via a send direct job order (i.e., for dangerous plant conditions). You can enter the following texts by pressing the

< F7 HELP> function key:

? CURSOR ?

5. CURSOR 5.

GROUP I

GROUP2

G 1...4 R

END

In the B-COLOR and F-COLOR fields, you can specify the colors i n which the messagedisplay function keys should be represented (i.e., input by entering the text, or pressing the <F7 HELP>function key).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The following choices are available with the field :

< F7 HELP>

function key i n the MEANING

"CURSOR UP" "SCROLL MESSAGES BACKWARD" "PAGE MESSAGES BACKWARD" "DISPLAY STARTING WITH FIRST MESSAGE" "ACKNOWLEDGE ALL DISPLAYED MESSAGES" "DISPLAY MESSAGES FROM GROUP 1" "DISPLAY MESSAGES FROM GROUP 3" "DISPLAY MESSAGES FROM ALL GROUPS" "CURSOR DOWN" "SCROLL MESSAGES FORWARD" "PAGE MESSAGES FORWARD" "DISPLAY LAST MESSAGE" "ACKNOWLEDGE MESSAGE AT CURSOR POSITION" "DISPLAY MESSAGES FROM GROUP 2" "DISPLAY MESSAGES FROM GROUP 4" "EXIT"

NOTE:
When you press the <F7 HELP> function key with the cursor in the MEANING field, the associated standard text is displayed in the TEXT field. When you press the < F6 SAVE > function key, the program checks the inputs and returns t o the MESSAGE DISPLAY form. When you press the < F6 STORE MSC. CM D > function key, the message display command i s stored. Then press the < F 8 EXIT> function key t o return t o the FUNCTION form. To define messages, you do not need t o input a command name i n the FUNCTION form. Press the <F3 MESSAGES> function key in the second part menu of this form and then press the < F3 PROGR. MESSAGE > function key i n the MESSAGES form t o branch t o the PROGRAM MESSAGES form. You can assign message texts t o process conditions or changes of such conditions (see Planning Guide COM GRAPH, Chapter 4).

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C27 7-0 1

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

In this form, you can generate message texts for each of the four message groups, whereby the number of messages is limited t o 1000, the number, however, may be in the range from 1 through 1999.

-> FUNCTION -> MESSAGES -> P R O G R A M M E S S A G E

................................................................................
DRIVE: B

COROS / COM GRAPH DEVICE: C P 5 2 6

PROGRAM: EXAMPLE

MESSAGE NUMBER: GROUP NUMBER: BACKGROUND COLOR: FOREGROUND COLOR: FLASHING:

M 0001 1 RED WHITE N

Job number and DB number must b e s p e c i f i e d i n t h e CP PARAMETER ASSIGNMENT rnas k .

Mark ATTRIBUTE CHANGE w i t h a c h a r a c t e r ( e x c e p t space) when changing t h e acknowledgement s t a t u s . 777777 TEXT: TEXT OF THE F I R S T MESSAGE & THMS
To i n s e r t d a t e and t i m e i n a message t e x t use &DMDY; N o t a l l p a r t s need b e s p e c i f i e d .

and &THMS;.

F 1 PREVIOUS MESSAGE

F 2 NEXT MESSAGE

F 3 FETCH MESSAGE

F 4 DELETE MESSAGE

F 5 BASIC STATUS

F 6 STORE MESSAGE

F 7 HELP

F 8 EXIT

With the MESSAGE NUMBER field, message numbers between 1 and 2000 are possible. In the GROUP NUMBER field, there are four different message groups. The BACKGROUND COLOR, FOREGROUND COLOR, and FLASHING fields determine how the message looks in the message display. If the acknowledgment status changes, then the parts of the message text marked with random characters i n the line above the TEXT field are displayed with the attributes specified i n the MESSAGE DISPLAY form.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-C217-01

Generating Displays

Chapter 5

The field above the TEXT field marks where an attribute change i n the message text should occur i f the acknowledgment status changes. You can make this marking with any character, with the exception of a blank. When the message text is decompiled, these characters are represented as a series of symbols.

"*"

With the TEXT field, you can incorporate the date and time areas into the message text i n any form and at any location. If you use handling blocks for message processing, i.e. you also do not use the software package "Signaling functions for standard CPW(see subsection [Link] "Message exchange between programma ble controller and C 526'7, P date and time can be read from the CP S26 using the programmable controller RECEIVE job 218. Message texts are output in the message display from column 3 t o column 71, inclusive. The function keys have the following meanings:

< F1 PREVIOUS MESSAGE> - The message number entered is decremented by 1.

<F2 NEXT MESSAGE > - The message number entered is incremented by 1.

< F3 FETCH MESSAGE> - The message with the number entered is decompiled and the data is transferred t o the form. < F4 DELETE MESSAGE> -The message with the number entered is deleted after a positive acknowledgment.
< F5 BASIC STATUS> - The form returns t o the basic status (i.e., i t is overwritten with the standard defaults). All fields are deleted except the BACKGROUND- BLACK, FOREGROUND - WHITE, and FLASHING - N fields.

<F6 STORE MESSAGE> - The form is checked for correctness and the message is stored under the specified number. Form data is not lost. If several messages are similar t o each other (e.g., "MOTOR 1 ON", "MOTOR 2 ON"), you do not need t o reenter all the data each time.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

Generating Displays

If messages come up, the program checks whether the corresponding message text exists. If the message text is missing, the message is passed over. If the text does exist, then i t i s stored in the order of processing i n a buffer, along w i t h date and time. When the buffer is full, the last message written t o the buffer is overwritten (overflow message). The number of overflow messages is communicated t o the C and displayed P flashing in the last line of the message display, starting at column [Link] control program printed for this example outputs messages M0181 t o M0196. However, since these can only be displayed when they exist in the C program, you should also enter the text for P the remaining messages. The messages, or acknowledgments, are exchanged with SEND DIRECT and RECEIVE ALL job orders. You must specify the job order number and data block number in the CPIOP PARAM. ASSIGNMENT form. You can find further information on the exchange o f acknowledgments and messages between the CP 526 and the controller in the CP description i n Chapter 3.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

5.5

PLC Program for Application Example for the 55-135U with CPU 928

For the application example t o run successfully, there must be a program running in the controller that is coordinated with the CP program. This program must perform the following functions: Control data communication between the CP 526 and controller For communication t o occur between the controller and CP 526, you must synchronize each with the other for every cold restart (OB20) and every warm restart (OB21,OBZZ). Without synchronization, no data exchange is possible. In this program, synchronization of the controller and CP occurs in program blocks PB6 and PB7. You must set interface number 4 on the CP 526. The actual data exchange between the controller and CP 526 occurs via handling blocks FBl26:SEND-A and FB 127: REC-A. These are called in the cyclic part of the program (OB1) by program block PB1.

Tank simulation
A process with t w o tanks is represented in the TANK display. As the actual process does not exist, the control program must simulate the following functions:

a) empty the tanks when the drainage valves are open The liquid level in the tanks is entered in value input fields or by a value input command, and stored by the CP 526 i n data word 0 or data word 1 of data block 20. This is where the value output fields and the bar windows fetch their output values t o display the liquid level i n the tanks.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-C27 7-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

When you press the <F2 VALVE1 O > function key, interprocessor communication P flag bit F 20.0 is set on the C by the set bit command SETI. It is reset when you press the < F1 VALVE1 C> function key. FB20:FILL 1 decreases the liquid level i n tank 1 (DB20, DWO) when interprocessor communication flag bit F 20.0 sets. Function block FB21:FILL 2 does the same for tank 2. It decreases the liquid level i n tank 2 (DB20, DW 1) when drainage valve 2 is opened (i.e., when interprocessor communication flag F 20.1 has a value of 1). For interprocessor communication flag bits F 20.0 and F 20.1 t o be evaluated i n the control program, you must enter flag byte FB20 of data block DB1 i n the PERIPHERAL ALLOCATION form as the input interprocessor communication flag. This data block is set up with a cold restart (OB20). b) generate the temperature curve for the curve window The temperature curve of both tanks is represented i n the pixel graphics curve window. Function blocks FB22:TEMP 1 and FB23:TEMP 2 generate these temperature curves. The temperature value for tank 1 is stored i n flag word FW21, and the value for tank 2 is stored in flag word FW23. C)organize old and new values for the CP 526 The temperature curves are displayed with old values. This means that when you call the display TANK, the CP 526 fetches the values of the last t w o minutes from the controller and displays them i n the curve window. Then the values are updated normally. The C fetches old values as entered in the P CURVE WINDOW form from data block DB21, starting with data word DWO. The structure of this data block is described in the operating instructions for the pixel graphics expansion board. The old and new temperature values are organized by FB 1O:CU RVE and made available t o the CP 526 in DB2 1.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-(217-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

This data block is set up with a cold restart (OB20) and preassigned zeros at that time. After a cold restart, i t takes t w o minutes until the data block is filled with old values. If the display TANK is called during this time, then impermissibleold values (zeros) are still in the data block, and t h e CP 526 outputs the error message Impermissible curve output value in the PC. d) trigger fault messages For fault messages t o be output in the message line and in the message display, they must be triggered by the control program. This function is performed by FB24:TRIGGER. I t triggers messages M0181 through M0196 cyclically. These messages constantly change their attributes (message arrived, message gone) and can be acknowledged in the message display. However, only those messages are displayed that are programmed on the CP.

Call the 'Signaling functions for standard CP' To accommodate message processing in the controller, the software package 'Signaling functions for standard CP' is available (see Ordering Data). For a cold restart of the signaling concept, program block PB6 is called in OB20. For a warm restart, PB8 is called i n OB21 and OB22. In OBl, the signaling concept is called by PB3. In OB13, a pulse is generated for a P signaling concept timer location. A completely parameterized example for the C 526 is included with the product. The control program is coordinated with this example.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

You must set interface number 4 on the C 526 module. Message triggering occurs P when you set (message active) and erase (message passive) flag bits. In this program, messages M0001 t o M0016 are triggered by cyclic setting and erasing of flag bits 0 t o 15 in flag word FW25 by FB:TRIGGER. You can find details on parameterizing the "Standard Signaling Concept" in the user description that accompanies this package. You must load the preparameterized example included with the product, and the blocks listed on the following pages, into the controller. The program listed on the following pages also runs without the signaling concept. You must make the changes described in the listing t o do this. Then no messages will be displayed by the CP. However the following standard handling blocks are necessary: FBI 20:SEND, F B I 21 :RECEIVE, F B I 22: FETCH, FBI 23:CONTROL, FB124: RESET, FBI 25:SYNCHRON, FBI 26:SEND-A and FB127:RECEIVE-A. You must load these, and the blocks listed on the fol Iowing pages, into the control Ier.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 7 7-0 1

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

5.5.1

STEP 5 Program with Handling Block Pararneterizationfor the SS-135U with CPU 928

LEN=15 PAGE 1 NETWORK 1

ABS

IF THE STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT IS NOT USED, THE PB 3 A N D THE FB 130 CALL MUST BE DELETED. 0000 PB1 000 1 :JU 0002 0003 0004 :JU PB2 0005 0006 :C DB6 0007 :JU FBI30 0008 NAME :ANLAUF 0009 0010 :JU PB3 001 1 0012 :BE

CALL OF HANDLING BLOCKS SEND-ALL A N D RECEIVE-ALL SlMU LATlON OF TANK PROCESS

CALL OF STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT

LEN= 11 PAGE l NETWORK 1

ABS

IF THE STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT IS NOT USED, THIS BLOCKSHOULD NOT BE INPUT. SECONDS PULSE FOR TIMER LOCATION OF STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT

5-1 18

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

LEN=27 PAGE 1 NETWORK 1

ABS

FIRSTGENERATE DATA BLOCK DB 20 FOR LIQUID LEVELS AND TRANSFER DATA BLOCK DB 21 FOR CURVE VALUES. THE SIGNALING CONCEPT IS PARAMETERIZED I N DATA BLOCKS DB 6:SRK, DB 14:PARA-R, DB 15:PARA-S AND DB 208: RANGE PARAMETERIZED. THESE DATA BLOCKS HAVE PREASSIGNED PARAMETERS A N D ARE INCLUDED O N THE DISK PROVIDED. THlS EXAMPLE IS COORDINATED WITH THlS PARAMETERIZATION, S 0 THAT THE SIGNALING PACKAGE DOES NOT NEED TO BE PARAMETERIZED A T STARTUP. ONLY THE FLAG WORD TO TRIGGER THE MESSAGES IS REPARAMETERIZEDTO FW 25. AFTER THIS REPARAMETERIZATION, PROGRAM BLOCK PB6 IS CALLED, FORA COLD RESTART OF THE SIGNALING CONCEPT. IN THIS PROGRAM BLOCK, PCAND CP 526ARE SYNCHRONIZED BY HANDLING BLOCK FB: 125 SYNCHRON. INTERFACE NUMBER4 MUST BE SET ON THE CP 526 MODULE. IF THE STANDARDSIGNALING CONCEPT IS NOT USED, THEN FB:SYNCHRON ONLY NEEDS TO BE CALLED TO SYNCHRONIZE CP 526 A N D PC. 0000 :JU FB2 0001 NAME:ANLAUF2 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 :C DB208 0009 OOOA :L KY25,l OOOB :T DW1 OOOC

REPARAMETERIZING OF THE SIGNALING PACKAGE: CALL DB:RANGE MESSAGE TRIGGER BY FLAG WORD FW 25

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

OOOD OOOE OOOF 0010

:JU

PB6

:BE

SYNCHRONIZATION CP 526 <- > PC A N D COLD RESTART OF STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT

OB2 1 NETWORK l

LEN= 10 PAGE 1

ABS

IF THE STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT IS NOT USED, THEN FB 125:SYNCHRON MUST BE CALLED HERE INSTEAD OF PB 8 TO SYNCHRONIZE THE CP 526 A N D THE PC.

SYNCHRONIZATION CP 526 C - > PC A N D W A R M RESTART OF THE STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT

OB22 NETWORK l

LEN = 10 PAGE 1

ABS

IF THE STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT IS NOT USED, THEN FB 125:SYNCHRON MUST BE CALLED HERE INSTEAD OF PB 8 T 0 SYNCHRONIZE THE CP 526AND THE PC.

SYNCHRONIZATION CP 526 C - > PC A N D W A R M RESTART OF THE STANDARD SIGNALING CONCEPT

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

PB 1 NETWORK l CALLING THE HANDLING BLOCKS:

LEN=21 PAGE 1

ABS

FOR DATA EXCHANGE TO TAKE PLACE BETWEEN THE CP 5 2 6 A N D THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER, HANDLING BLOCKS FB 126:SEND-ALL AND FB 127:RECEIVE-ALL MUST BE CALLED IN THE CYCLIC PART OF THE PROGRAM. THE INTERFACE NUMBER 4 ENTERED HERE UNDER THE PARAMETER SSNR MUST ALSO BE SET ON THE CP 526 MODULE! 0000 000 1 0002 NAME 0003 SSNR 0004 A-NR 0005 ANZW 0006 PAFE 0007 0008 0009 NAME OOOA SSNR OOOB A-NR OOOC ANZW OOOD PAFE OOOE OOOF

CALL SEN D-ALL: INTERFACE NUMBER = 4 JOB ORDER NUMBER ZERO = ALL DISPLAY WORD PARAMETERIZATION ERROR BYTE :1U FBI27 :REC-A : KY0,4 : KY0,O : FW8 : FB3 CALL RECEIVE-ALL: INTERFACE NUMBER = 4 JOB ORDER NUMBER ZERO = ALL DISPLAY WORD PARAMETERIZATION ERROR BYTE

PB2 NETWORK 1

LEN = 3 7 PAGE 1

ABS

TANK PROCESS SIMULATION A N D OLDINEW VALUE ORGANIZATION FOR THE CURVE WINDOW:

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter S

THE DISPLAY OF THE PROCESS USING TANKS CONSISTS OF TWO HEATED TANKS. THE TANKS ARE EMPTIED BY MEANS OF DRAINAGE VALVES A N D FILLED BY MEANS OF ENTRIES MADE IN VALUE INPUT FIELDS OR A VALUE INPUT COMMAND. THE TANK TEMPERATURE TRENDS ARE REPRESENTED WITH OUTPUT OF OLD VALUES IN A CURVE WINDOW. AS THE ACTUAL PROCESS DOES NOT EXIST, THE PC PROGRAM MUST SIMULATE THE TEMPERATURE TRENDS, THE EMPTYING OF THE TANKS, A N D THE TRIGGERING OF FAULT MESSAGES. FORTHE CURVE WINDOW, THE PC MUST ORGANIZE OLD A N D NEW VALUES. THE INDIVIDUAL FUNCTIONS ARE DISTRIBUTED AMONG THE FOLLOWING FUNCTION BLOCKS: FB 20:FILL 1 FB 21 :FILL 2 FB 22:TEMP 1 FB 23:TEMP 2 FB 24:TRIGGER FB 10:CURVE EMPTY TANK 1, WHEN DRAINAGEVALVE 1 ISOPENED. EMPTY TANK 2, WHEN DRAINAGE VALVE 2 IS OPENED. GENERATE TEMPERATURE CURVE FOR TANK 1. GENERATE TEMPERATURE CURVE FOR TANK 2. TRIGGER FAULT MESSAGES ORGANIZATION OF OLD A N D NEW VALUES FORTHE CURVE WINDOW

DB

IN THE COM "CURVE WINDOW" FORM, DATA BLOCK DB21 IS ENTERED IN THE "DB" FIELD AS THE SENDING DATA BLOCK. -> DB21

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program forApplication Example

CURVE NO. 1 AND CURVE NO. 2 HAVE BEEN CONFIGURED. THEY MUST BE ENABLED IN THE ENABLE WORD. - > KMOOOOOOOO 000000 1 1 THE CURVE RESOLUTION DEPENDS TO A GREAT EXTENT ON THE PARAMETERS OLD-VALUE NUMBERAZAND F. ONE SECOND IS ENTERED AS THE UPDATE RATE UPD IN THE "CURVE WINDOW" FORM OF COM. THE TOTALTIME SPAN TTSPOFTWO MINUTES MUST BE RECORDED IN THE OLD VALUES. THE NUMBER OF ALL OLD VALUES M A Y NOT EXCEED 240. THERE ARE THEREFORE A MAXIMUM OF 120 OLD VALUESAVAILABLE PER CURVE. -> AZ < = 120 TO OBTAIN THE HIGHEST RESOLUTION POSSIBLE, F SHOULD BE SELECTEDAS SMALL AS POSSIBLE (1 < = F < = 15). ACCORDING TO THE FORMULA TTSP = TA * F * AZ FOR THIS EXAMPLE YOU GET AN OPTIMUM PARAMETERIZATION OF: F = 1, AZ = 120 FURTHER POSSIBLE PARAMETERIZATIONS, BUT WITH LESS CLEAR RESOLUTION, COULD BE FOR EXAMPLE: F = 2,AZ = 60; F = 3,AZ = 40;.. HERE THE OPTIMUM PARAMETERIZATION HAS BEEN CHOSEN: - > A Z = 120, F= 1 THE TEMPERATURE OF TANK 1, AS REPRESENTED BY CURVE 1, IS STORED BY FB:TEMP 1 IN FLAG WORD FW 21. -> KY0,21 THE TEMPERATURE OF TANK 2, AS REPRESENTED BY CURVE 2, IS STORED BY FB:TEMP 2 IN FLAG WORD FW 23. -> KY0,23 W 3 TO W6 THESE CURVES ARE NOT ENABLED. -> INPUT IRRELEVANT THE UPDATE RATE THAT WAS ENTERED IN THE COM "CURVE WINDOW" FORM MUST BE ENTERED HERE. -> KT100.0

SiemensAG C79000-68576-U 17-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

LEN = 3 7 PAGE 1 SEE ABOVE -> KF + 1

ABS

A FREE TIMER FOR UPDATING MUST BE ENTERED HERE. -> 1 6 0000 000 1 0002 NAME 0003 0004 0005 NAME 0006 0007 0008 NAME 0009 OOOA O O NAME OB OO OC OOOD O O NAME OE OO OF 0010 001 1 NAME 0012 DB 0013 N 0014AZ 0015 W1 PROCESS LIQUID LEVEL TANK 1 PROCESS LIQUID LEVEL TANK 2 TEMPERATURE CURVE FOR TANK 1 TEMPERATURE CURVE FOR TANK 2 TRIGGER FAULT MESSAGES :JU FBlO :CURVE : DB21 : KM00000000 0000001 1 : KF+120 : KYO,21 ORGANIZATION OF OLD AND NEW VALUES SEND DATA BLOCK ENABLE CURVES 1 AND 2 120 OLD VALUES PER CURVE TEMPERATURE TANK 1 FROM FW 21 TEMPERATURE TANK 2 FROM FW 23 CURVE NOT USED CURVE NOT USED CURVE NOT USED CURVE NOT USED WINDOW UPDATE RATE EACH NEW VALUE BECOMES AN OLD VALUE TIMER FOR UPDATING

0017 W 3 0018 W 4 0019 W 5 00 1A $ W ~ 001B TA OOlC F

Siemens AG C79000-88576-V 17-07

Chapter S

P C Program for Application Example L

LEN = 43 PAGE 1 NETWORK 1 0000

THIS FUNCTION BLOCK CHECKS THAT DATA BLOCKS DB 20 AND DB 21 EXIST (SEE DB 20). IF A DB DOES NOT EXIST, IT IS GENERATED BY FB 2.

0005 0007 0009 OOOA OOOB OOOD OO OE OOOF 0010 0012 0014 0015M001 0017 0019 00 lA 001B 001D 001 E 001F 0020 0022 0024 0025

:L :L :+F :LIR :L :XF :JC= :L :E :L :L :+F :LIR :L :XF :BEC :L :G :BE

KH DFOO KF+20 1 KH 0000 M001 KF+2 DB 20 KH DFOO KF+21 1 KH 0000

SCAN TO DETERMINE IF DB 20 ALREADY EXISTS IN PC.

SET UP DB 20 WITH A LENGTH OF 2 WORDS. SCAN TO DETERMINE IF DB 21 ALREADY EXISTS IN PC.

KF + 256 DB21

SET UP DB 21 WITH A LENGTH OF 256 WORDS.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-017-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

LEN = 42 PAGE 1 NETWORK 1 PROCESS LIQUID LEVEL TANK 1:

ABS

THlS FUNCTION BLOCK EMPTIES TANK 1 WHEN VALVE 1 IS OPENED. THE SET BIT COMMAND "SET1 " SETS FLAG BIT F 20.0 WHEN THE < F2 VALVE1 O> FUNCTION KEY IS PRESSED IN THE "TANK" DISPLAY. THE FLAG BIT IS RESET WHEN THE < F1 VALVE1 C> FUNCTION KEY IS PRESSED, FOR THE STATUS OF THlS FLAG BITTO BE EVALUATED IN THE PC PROGRAM, FLAG BYTE FB 20 MUST BE DEFINED IN DATA BLOCK 1 AS A N INPUT INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATION FLAG. AS PROGRAMMED IN THE DYNAMICDISPLAY "DYNl",THECP526STORESTHE INPUT AND OUTPUT VALUE FOR THE LIQUID LEVEL OF TANK 1 IN, OR FETCHES IT FROM, DB 20, DW 0. WHEN F 20.0 IS SET, FB: FILL 1 DECREMENTS THlS VALUE BY 100 EVERY SECOND. THlS CAUSES THE LIQUID LEVEL TO DECREASE BY 100 LITERS PER SECOND, WHEN THE DRAINAGE VALVE IS OPENED. NAME :FILL 1 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 OOOA OO OB OOOD OOOE 000 F 0010 VALVE 1 OPEN ? N O - > END
1 SECOND PASSED ? N O - > END

START TIMER (PULSE TIMER)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C2 17-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

001 1 0012 :C DB20 0013 0014 :L KF+O 0016 :L DWO 0017 00 18 :ADD KF-100 OOlA 001B :>F 001C :JC = M001 001 D :T DWO 001 E 001 F :BEU 0020 0021 MOO1 :TAK 0022 :T DWO 0023 0024 :BE

CALL I10 DATA BLOCK

LIQUID LEVEL TANK 1 (DB20, DWO) DECREMENT BY 100 LIQUID LEVEL < 0 ? NO -> ENTER NEW LIQUID LEVEL YES -> ENTER LIQUID LEVEL ZERO

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C2 17-0 1

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

FB21 NETWORK 1 PROCESS LIQUID LEVEL TANK 2:

LEN = 41 PAGE 1

ABS

THIS FUNCTION BLOCK EMPTIESTANK2 WHEN VALVE 2 IS OPENED. SET BITCOMMAND "SETZ" SETS FLAG BIT F 20.1 WHEN THE < F4 VALVE2 O> FUNCTION KEY IS PRESSED IN THE "TANK" DISPLAY. THE FLAG BIT IS RESET WHEN THE < F3 VALVE2 C> FUNCTION KEY IS PRESSED, FORTHE STATUS OF THlS FLAG BITTO BE EVALUATED IN THE PC PROGRAM, FLAG BYTE FB 20 MUST BE DEFINED IN DATA BLOCK 1 AS A N INPUT INTERPROCESSOR COMMUNICATION FLAG. AS PROGRAMMED IN THE DYNAMIC DISPLAY " DYN 1 ",THE CP 526 STORES THE INPUT A N D OUTPUTVALUE FORTHE LIQUID LEVEL OF TANK 2 IN, OR FETCHES IT FROM, DB 20, DW 1. WHEN F 20.1 IS SET, FB:FILL 2 DECREMENTS THlS VALUE BY 100 EVERY SECOND. THIS CAUSES THE LIQUID LEVEL TO DECREASE BY 100 LITERS PER SECOND, WHEN THE DRAINAGE VALVE IS OPENED. NAME :FILL 2 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 OOOA OOOB OOOD OOOE OOOF 0010 001 1 VALVE 2 OPEN 7 NO -> END (BLOCK END CONDITIONAL)
1 SECOND PASSED ? N O - > END

START TIMER

9 Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U17-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

CALL I/O DATA BLOCK

LIQUID LEVEL TANK 2 (DB20, DW1) DECREMENT BY 100 LIQUID LEVEL < 0 ?

NO -> ENTER NEW LIQUID LEVEL YES -> ENTER LIQUID LEVEL ZERO

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C217-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

FB22 NETWORK 1 SIMULATE TEMPERATURE TREND TANK 1

LEN = 79 PAGE 1

ABS

THE TEMPERATURE TREND FOR TANK 1 CONSISTS OF FOUR LINEAR SEGMENTS. A TIMER IS STARTED EVERY 120 SECONDS. DEPENDING ON THE TlME RANGE, THE TEMPERATURE IS CALCULATED FROM ONE OF THE FOUR LINEAR EQUATIONS AND STORED IN FLAG WORD FW 21. TlMERANGE1: TlME RANGE 2: TlME RANGE 3: TlME RANGE 4: NAME :TEMP 1 0005 0006 0007 0008 OOOA OOOB OOOC OOOD OOOE OOOF M001 0010 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0018 0019 00 1A 001B :A T 3 :JC = M 0 0 1 :L :A :S1 :AN :S1 KT120.2 T3 13 T3 T3 TIMER RUN OUT? JUMP IF NO START TIMER OSEC.=<T<31SEC. ->TEMP=6*T+20 31 SEC. = < T < 61 SEC. -> TEMP = -3 * T + 290 61 SEC. = < T < 91 SEC. -> TEMP = 110 91 SEC. = < T < 121 SEC. -> TEMP = -3 * T + 380

:LD T 3 :L KT031.2 :<F :JC = M 0 0 2 :LD T 3 :L KT061.2 :<F :JC = M 0 0 3 :LD T 3

TlME WITHIN TlME RANGE l ? 0<=T<31? JUMP IF YES TlME WITHIN TlME RANGE 2 ? 31 < = T < 6 1 ? JUMP IF YES TlME WITHIN TlME RANGE 3 ?

Siemens AG C79000-88576-(217-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

61 < = T < 9 1 ? JUMP IF YES TlME WITHIN TlME RANGE 4 ? 91 < = T < 121 ? JUMP IF YES :L T3 :L KF+6 :XF KF+20 :L :+F :T FW21 :BEU :L T3 :L KF-3 :XF KF+290 :L :+F :T FW21 :BEU :L KF+ 110 :T FW21 :BEU TlME RANGE 1 : TEMP = 6 * T

+ 20

TlME RANGE 2: TEMP = -3 * T

290

TlME RANGE 3: TEMP = 110

TlME RANGE 4: TEMP = - 3 * T

380

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

FB23 NETWORK 1 SIMULATE TEMPERATURE TREND TANK 2:

LEN = 67 PAGE 1

ABS

THE TEMPERATURE TREND FOR TANK 2 CONSISTS OF THREE LINEAR SEGMENTS. A TIMER IS STARTED EVERY 100 SECONDS. DEPENDING ON THE TlME RANGE, THE TEMPERATURE IS CALCULATED FROM ONE OF THE THREE LINEAR EQUATIONSAND STORED IN FLAG WORD FW 23. TlME RANGE 1: TlME RANGE 2: TlME RANGE 3: NAME :TEMP2 0005 0006 0007 0008 OO OA OO OB OO OC OO OD OOOE OOOFM001 0010 0012 0013 0014 001 5 0016 0018 0019 001A 001B :A :JC :L :A :S1 :AN :S1 T4 =M001 KT100.2 T4 T4 T4 T4 TIMER RUN OUT ? JUMP IF NO START TIMER 0 SEC. = < T < 51 SEC. S1 SEC. = < T < 76 SEC. 76SEC. = < T < 101 SEC.

-> TEMP = 1 * T + 50 -> TEMP = 4 * T - 100 -> TEMP = -6 * T + 650

:LD T 4 :L KT051.2 :<F :JC =MOO2 :LD T 4 :L KT076.2 :<F :JC = M003 :LD T 4

TlME WITHIN TlME RANGE 1 1 0<=T<51? JUMP IF YES TlME WITHIN TlME RANGE 2 ? 51 < = T < 7 6 ? JUMP IF YES TlME WITHIN TlME RANGE 3 ?

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 7 7-0 1

Chapter S

PLC Program for Application Example

:L KT101.2 :<F :JC = M 0 0 4 :L T4 KF+1 :L :XF KF+50 :L :+F :T FW23 :BEU :L T4 KF+4 :L :XF :L KF-100 :+F :T FW23 :BEU
:L :L :XF :L :+F :T

7 6 < = T < 101?

TlME RANGE 1: TEMP = 1 * T

+ 50

TIME RANGE 2: TEMP = 4 * T - 100

T4 KF-6 KF+650 FW23

TlME RANGE 3: TEMP = -6 * T

+ 650

:BE

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

FB24 NETWORK 1 TRIGGER MESSAGES:

LEN = 40 PAGE 1

ABS

IN OB 20, FLAG WORD FW 25 WAS PARAMETERIZED TO TRIGGER MESSAGES VIA THE SIGNALING PACKAGE. BY SETTING BITS 0 THROUGH 15 IN THIS FLAG WORD, THE CP 526 ASSIGNS THE ATTRIBUTE "MESSAGE COMING" TOTHE CORRESPONDING MESSAGES M0181 THROUGH M0196. BY DELETING BITS 0 THROUGH 15 IN THIS FLAG WORD, THE CP 526ASSlGNS THE ATTRIBUTE "MESSAGE GOING" TO THE CORRESPONDING MESSAGES M0181 THROUGH M0196. FB 24:TRIGGER TRIGGERS THE OUTPUT OF MESSAGES EVERY 5 SECONDS. ONLY MESSAGES PROGRAMMED ON THE CP 526 ARE OUTPUT. THE MESSAGE THAT ARRIVED LAST IS OUTPUT IN THE MESSAGE LINE. ALL ACTIVE MESSAGES ARE OUTPUT IN THE MESSAGE DISPLAY WITH THE CORRESPONDING ATTRIBUTES AND CAN BE ACKNOWLEDGED. NAME :TRIGGER 0005 0006 0007 0008 OOOA OOOB OOOC OOOD OOOE OOOF 001 1 0012 0013 0014 001 5 0016 0017 00 18 5 SECONDS GONE BY ? N O - > END YES -> START TIMER

LOAD COMPARATOR LOAD FLAG WORD TO TRIGGER MESSAGES ALL MESSAGES GONE? (TRIGGER-BITS 0 THRU 16 = O)? NO -> TRIGGER NEW MESSAGES

Siemens AG C79000-88576-0 17-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

0019 00 lA 001C 001 D 001 E 001F MOO1 0020 002 1 0022

:L KM00001 100 101 11001 :T FW25 :BEU

YES -> START NEW MESSAGE CYCLE AND TRIGGER MESSAGES

:SLW 1 :T W25 :BE

TRIGGER NEW MESSAGES

Siemens AG C79000-88576-V 7-01 7

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

LEN=258 PAGE 1

ABS

FUNCTION BLOCK TO ORGANIZE THE OLD A N D NEW VALUES FOR PIXELGRAPHIC CURVE DISPLAY WlTH THE CP526lCP5271CP528 A N D OP30B. FB 10 TAKES OVER UPDATING A N D ORGANIZING THE DATA BLOCK CONTAINING OLD A N D NEW VALUES FOR DISPLAYING TIME-DEPENDENT CURVE PLOTS WlTH THE CP. IT MUST BE CALLED IN THE CYCLIC PART OF THE PROGRAM. CALLING A N D PARAMETERIZING THE HANDLING BLOCKS NECESSARY FOR DATA EXCHANGE WlTH THE CP MUST BE DONE BY THE USER. PARAMETERS: DB1- DB255, FORMAT B DATA BLOCK IN WHICH LIST OF OLD A N D NEW VALUES SHOULD BE STORED. THIS DATA BLOCK MUST BE SPECIFIED IN THE "CURVE WINDOW" MENU ASTHE DATA BLOCK FORTHE OUTPUTVALUES. D W 0 MUST BE SPECIFIED AS THE DATA WORD. IT IS TO BE ALLOCATED A LENGTH OF 255 DATA WORDS. CONTROL-WORD, FORMAT K M CURVES 1 - 6ARE ENABLED BY SETTING THE CORRESPONDING BITS 0 5. UPDATING OF OLD A N D NEW VALUE LISTS IS ONLY DONE FOR ENABLED CURVES. BIT 6 DESIGNATES THE NUMERICAL FORMAT OF THE VALUES. (1 = BYTE, 0 = 16-BIT FP). OLD- VALUE OUTPUT CAN BE SUPPRESSED BY SETTING BIT 7, AS LONG AS NO NEW VALUES ARE PRESENT, FOR EXAMPLE AFTER A COLD RESTART.

Siemens AG C79000-68576-C217-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

NUMBER OF OLD VALUES, FORMAT KF NUMBER OF OLD VALUES PER CURVE. 1) 16-BIT FP REPRESENTATION (NUMBER OF OLD VALUES * NUMBEROF CURVES < = 240) 2) BYTE REPRESENTATION THE M A X I M U M NUMBER OF OLD VALUESAMOUNTS FOR 1 CURVE TO 240 OLD VALUES 2 CURVES TO 240 OLD VALUES 3 CURVES TO 160 OLD VALUES 4 CURVES TO 120 OLD VALUES 5 CURVES T O 9 6 OLD VALUES 6 CURVES TO 80 OLD VALUES W1 -W6 CURVE VALUES, FORMAT KY THE Y-VALUES TO BE DISPLAYED ARE SENT TO THE FB VIA FLAG WORDS OR DATA WORDS, WHEREBY THE FOLLOWING APPLIES: VALUE FROM FLAG WORD Y KY O,Y KY X,Y VALUE FROM DATA WORD Y DATA BLOCK X (X >0) UPDATE TIME, FORMAT KT THE AMOUNT OF TlME IN WHICH THE CP UPDATES THE VALUES IS TO BE ENTERED HERE (1 SEC., 2 SEC., 5 SEC., 10 SEC., 30 SEC., 1 MIN., 2 MIN., 5 MIN.) TIMER FOR UPDATING, FORMAT T IN ORDER TO SCAN EVEN LONGER TlME PERIODS WITH A LIMITED NUMBER OF OLD VALUES, IT IS POSSIBLE TO ENTER A VALUE INTO THE OLD-VALUE LIST AFTER MULTIPLE UPDATINGS, RATHER THAN AFTER EACH UPDATING. IN THIS CASE, THE TIME INTERVAL BETWEEN OLD VALUES IS F * TA. THE TOTAL TlME PERIOD COVERED BY THE OLD VALUES AMOUNTS TO: TTSP = A Z * F * T A .

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

NAME DES DES DES DES DES DES DES DES DES DES DES DES 0029 002A 002B 002C 002D 002E 002F 0030 003 1 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 003A :A =TI :BEC :DO = DB :LW = T A :A =TI :SP =TI :AN =TI :SP =TI :LW = N :T DLO :T FB202 :LW = A Z :T DRO :LW = F :T DL9 :L KBO :T FB203

KM/KH/KY/KSlKFlKTlKUKG: K M KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKUKG: KF KMlKH/KY/KSlKFlKTlKC~KG KY : KMlKHlKYlKSlKFlKTIKUKG: KY KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKUKG: KY KMIKHIKY/KWKFlKTIKUKG: KY KM/KH/KYlKSlKFlKTlKUKG: KY KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKUKG: KY KMlKHlKY/KSlKFlKTlKUKG: KT KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKUKG: KF

UPDATE TlME RUN OUT ? CALL SENDING DATA BLOCK

START TIMER WITH UPDATE TlME

ENTER ENABLE WORD INTO DLO

ENTER NUMBER OLD VALUES IN DRO ENTER F IN DL9 WORK BYTE FOR FORMAT "BYTE"

.***

SiemensAG 09000-88576-U 17-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

NETWORK 2 003B 003D 003E 003F 0040 0041 LOOP 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 M001 0047 0048 0049 004A 004B 004C 004D FB 10 004E 004F 0050 0051 RET 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B M002 005C 0050 005E 005F

:L :T :L :T :T :DO :AN :JC :DO :JU :LW :JU :LW :JU :LW :JU :LW :JU

KY0,202 FW204 KB1 FB206 FB207 FW204 F 0.0 = WE1 FW206 =M001 =W1 =RET =W2 =RET =W3 =RET =W4 =RET

PROCESS NEW VALUE CURVES 1 TO 6 BIT NO., BYTE NO. FOR IND. ADR.

COUNTER CURVES JUMP LABEL POINTER

( = AN F 202.0 TO AN F 202.7) ENABLE CURRENT CURVE (1,3,5,7#9,11)

DEPENDING ON THE CURVE NUMBER, THE CORRESPONDING PARAMETER IS LOADED

"JUMP ISLAND"

:LW :JU :LW :T :L :L :>F :JC :DO :L :DO :T :JU :DO :C :DO :L :DO

=W5 =RET =W6 FW200 FB200 KBO =M002 FW200 FWO FW205 DWO = WE1 FW199 DBO FW2OO DWO =DB

STORE PARAMETERSW 1 - W6 CHECK IF NEW VALUE IN DB OR FW

ENTER OUTPUT VALUE FROM FLAG INTO SENDING DATA BLOCK ENTRY POINTER

ENTER OUTPUT VALUE FROM DATA BLOCK INTO SENDING DATA BLOCK

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

0060 006 1 0062 WE1 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 006A 006B 006C 0060 006E 006F SEGE NETWORK 3 0070 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 007C 007D 007E M001 007F 0080 008 1 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 M002

:DO :T :L :L :<F :JC :I :T :L :l :T :L

FW205 DWO KB6 FB206 =SEGE

1

ENTRY POINTER

LAST STRING REACHED ?

INCREMENT STRING COUNTER

FB206 FB207 2 FB207 FB204 :I 1 :T F0204 :JU =LOOP

.X**

INCREMENT JUMP LABEL POINTER

INCREMENT STRING ENABLE BIT RETURN TOTHE BEGINNING OFTHE LOOP

:L KY0,202 :T FW204 :L KB1 :T FB206 :L K010 :T FB207 :L DL9 :L DL8 :! = F :JC =M001
:I 1

PROCESS OLD VALUE CURVES 1 TO 6 BIT NO., BYTE NO. FOR IND. ADR.

COUNTER CURVES BLOCK POINTER ENTER NEW VALUES IN OLD VALUE LIST ?

INCREMENT CYCLE COUNTER

:T DL8 :BEU :L KB1 :T DL8 :L DRO :L DR8 :I 1 :>F :JC = MOO2 :L KBO :T DR8

RESET CYCLE COUNTER

END OF POLLING BUFFER FOR OLD VALUES REACHED 1 RESET ENTRY COUNTER

5- 140

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C21 7-01

Chapter 5

PLC Program for Application Example

IDENTIFIER BYTE
:2

A: F 1O@@[Link] B 008B 008C 008D 008E LOOP 008F 0090 009 1 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A 0098 009C DL 009D 009E 009F OA OO 00A1 DR 00A2 00A3 WE1 00A4 00A5 00A6 00A7 00A8 00A9 OOAA OOAB :T FB208 :SPZ = LOOP :S F203.0 FB208 :L :L FB207 :+F :T DR9 :DO W 2 0 4 :AN FO.0 :JC =WE1 :DO FW205 :L DWO :A F202.6 :JC =DL :DO DW9 :T DWO :JU = WE1 :A F203.0 :JC =DR :DO DW9 :T DLO :JU = WE1 :DO DW9 :T DRO :L KB6 :L FB206 :<=F :JC =SEGE :I 1 :T FB206 :L DRO :AN F202.6 :JC = WE11

IDENTIFIER DR COMPUTE ENTRY POINTER CURVE 1 CURRENT ENTRY POINTER ENABLE CURRENT CURVE ? STRING NUMBER IDENTIFIER BYTE ENTER NEW VALUE CURVE X IN OLDVALUE LIST CURVE X IDENTIFIER DR ENTER NEW VALUE BYTE BY BYTE

ENTER NEW VALUE BYTE BY BYTE

LAST STRING REACHED ?

INCREMENTSTRING POINTER

IDENTIFIER BYTE

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-01

PLC Program for Application Example

Chapter 5

OOAC OOAD WE11 OOAE OOAF OOBO O Bl O BBB2 00B3 00B4 SEGE

:2

BLOCK POINTER TO NEXT BLOCK

INCREMENT STRING ENABLE BIT RETURN TO THE BEGINNING OF THE LOOP

Assignment of data block DB 1 for 110 allocation: Digital inputs: Digital outputs: IPC flag inputs: IPC flag outputs: Time block length:
,
I I I

,
I

, 20 , , ,
I I

,
I

, ,
I

, ,
I I

,
,

,
I

I
I I

, ,
I I

,
I

,
,

,
,

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-Q 17-01

Contents
Communications Processor CP 526 Contents C79000-B8576-C217

Introduction

Ordering Data Technical Description of the CP 526 Module Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board Example of an Application Program for the CP 526

System Restrictions

Appendix A CP 526 Error Messages ~79000-~8576-~217-01 Reference Literature B

Chapter 6

Contents

6
6.1 6.2

System Restrictions

...............................
.........................

6-3

System Restrictions CP 526

..................................... 6-3
6-8

System Restrictions Expansion Module

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Contents

Chapter 6

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-07

Chapter 6

System Restrictions

6
6.1

System Restrictions
System Restrictions CP 526

Hardware Basic module color Basic module monochrome Expansion unit possible Operation in programmable controller Yes Yes Yes For ambient temperature < 55C with fan Operation with expansion board only with fan + 5 V, tolerance 5% + 24V, tolerance + 251-15% at 5 V; 2.2 A at 24 V; max. 240 mA (with process keyboard) 1 SPS (20.32 mm) 2 SPS (40.64 mm) 115U/135Ul15OU/155U R + S,B,S/composite video; I G max. 80/100 m 20 mA, TTY 9600 bps 2400 bps; max, 2001150 m

Power supply Power consumption

Slot width basic module Slot width expansion board Possible programmable controllers Monitor connection t o C P (colorlmonochrome) One serial interface for connection t o programmer and keyboard Programmer Keyboard

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-(217-01

System Restrictions

Chapter 6

Hardware Screen resolution, high resolution Screen resolution, low resolution Horizontal frequency, high resolution Horizontal frequency, low resolution Display format Pixel matrix high resolution (H * W) Pixel matrix normal resolution (H * W) Number of colors for foreground and background User memory basic module Max. available user memory (with expansion board) Internal hardware clock 640 * 468 640 * 234 30.84 kHz 15.44 kHz 26 * 80 (including 2 lines for function key labelling)) 18*8 9*8 8
128 kbytes

256 kbytes Yes

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-0 1

Chapter 6

System Restrictions

Software Standard sym bolslsymbol set Editable sym bolslsymbol set Symbol sets per user fi Ie Lexicon data Segments Static displays Segments per static display Dynamic displays Pixel graphics displays Functions Additional display of process windows Message texts max. Internal message buffer for (max. messages) Variables i n message texts Dateltime of day in message text 4 message statuses 4 message groups Pixel graphic text representation: - Character path in degrees - Different increments - Increment of value output field Curve representation: 1) - Curve windowsldisplay - Curve windowslwindow - Colot-S - Line types - Fill-in patterns - Limit-dependent color range
1)

128 Yes 20 63 250 250 32 250 250 250 No 1000 100 No Yes Yes Yes 0, 90, 180,270, max. 16 max. 16 6 6 8 8 8 Yes

1)

Can only be configured in conjunction with the CP expansion board.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

System Restrictions

Chapter 6

Software One pixel graphic display can contain 50 bars, value output fields and curve windows per display
1 to 80 Yes

Bar representation - Bar width (number of symbols) - Limit-dependent color range 1) Configurable input/output fields Process variables per display Message printout Reports Programmable controller functions: - Scanning of cursor postitions in PLC - Monitoringldisablinglsimulation of keyboard - Initiating display updating - Dynamic DBIDW offset - Shape output with variable color attributes - Readablejobnumberljobtype - Readable printer status

No approx. 150 No No No Simul. No No No No No

1)

Can only be configured in conjunction with the CP expansion board.

6-6

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C21 7-0 1

Chapter 6

System Restrictions

General characteristics BED1 standard software for diagnostics GRAPH 5 CP552 - StatusiForce Variables Configuration with Configuration on Speed : Example: AUT-912 test display with 40 shapes 40 bars and 100 values Initial display generation Update

NO NO No
C O M GRAPH PG 635-11,685,695, 710-11,730,750,770

8 sec 7 sec

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

System Restrictions

Chapter 6

6.2

System Restrictions Expansion Module

Hardware Operation i n programmable controller Power supply Current consumption User memory in combination w i t h C 526 basic board (color) P C 527 basic board P only w i t h fan + 5 V, tolerance 5% 2.3 A 128 kbytes max. 256 kbytes max.

Software Text representation Character path i n degrees Different increments Increments o f value output fields Curve representation

0,90, 180,270 max. 16 max. 16

6 curve windows / display 6 curves/window 8 colors 8 line types 8 filling patterns Configurable limit value and color change

Bar width

1 t o 80 characters Configurable limit value and color change 50 bars, value output fields and curve windows per display

One pixel graphic display can contain

SiemensAG C79000-B8576-U 7-0 7 1

Contents
Communications Processor CP 526 Contents C79000-B8576-C217

Introduction

Ordering Data Technical Description of the CP 526 Module Technical Description of the CP Expansion Board Example of an Application Program for the CP 526 System Restrictions

Appendix
A CP 526 Error Messages ~79000-68576-~217.01 B Reference Literature

10

Appendix

Contents

Appendix A CP 526 Error Messages Appendix B Reference Literature

...................... .......................

A-3
B-l

Siemens AG C79000-88576-C2 17-01

A- l

Contents

Appendix

Siemens AG C79000-68576-U7-0 1 1

Appendix A

CP 526 Error Messages

Appendix A:

CP 526 Error Messages

When an error occurs, the CP 526 displays a message number in the second part of the command line. To display the corresponding text, you must store the message texts in the error message file. If you do not do this, and the standard error messages supplied (COMLIB) are not transferred with COM to the CP 526, only the message numbers (e.g., W02) are displayed. You can find the numbers and the corresponding text in the following pages.
W01:

ERROR: command queue too long!

The command buffer has an overflow; commands may have been lost, because they were sent faster than other commands were processed.
W02:

Command does not exist!

A command was not programmed, a command was not transferred, an

incorrect name was entered, or an incorrect user card was inserted.

W03:

Last input not enabled!

This message is displayed when you press the < ENTER> function key, although you did not terminate the last entry in the entry field by pressing the < RETURN > function key.

W04:

ERROR: Input field overwritten!

When you tried to position the cursor at a specific entry field, the entry field was overlaid by an output field or a figure output. This indicates a planning error.
W05: W06: ERROR in input processing .ERROR in input processing

/5
/6

CP 526 Error Messages

Appendix A

W07: W08: W09: W10:

ERROR in input processing ERROR in input processing

/7

ERROR in command structure /9

Command incomplete in CP 5 2 6 !

During selective transfer, parts of a display (i.e., segment, static display, dynamic display, symbol set) were not transferred. This indicates a planning error.
W11: Trouble in data exchange with the controller!

A t this time, the controller cannot deliver the data t o the C 526. If a P controller/CP 526 synchronization should have occurred earlier, new values can be received only after a new synchronization.
W12: W13: W14:
ERROR in command structure! ERROR during system start-up!

/l2

Illegal output value in controller!

The controller value is illegal for the defined display format. Blanks are displayed for input/output fields.
W15: Illegal input value!

The CP 526 cannot convert the value into the defined controller format. For example, letters are situated i n a numeric field, or the number of places before the decimal point is greater than the number of character ; positions (COM planning).
W16: Input value too small!

The limit value fell below the minimum.

SiemensAG C79000-88576-U 7-0 1 1

Appendix A

CP 526 Error Messages

W17:

Input value too great!

The limit value exceeded the maximum.

W18:

Input value required for command!

You did not specify an input value after the "-" character.

W19:

Illegal date/time format!

For example, a wrong separator, a wrong sequence, or illegal values were specified.

W20:

Gain factor 0 illegal!

The value 0 stands for the gain value i n the data block. This results i n a division by 0 during the input check.

W21:

Date/time cannot be shown at present!

Access is not possible because a t the time of the display, the CP 526 was changing the time, or the controller was writing or reading the time.

W23:

No pixel graphics monitor connected!

A n attempt was made t o call pixel graphics displays, although the CP 526 parameters are set for a low-resolution monitor.

W24: W25:

Illegal bar value in the controller! Expansion unit not present!!

J

/24

:9

.;

Commands have been programmed which requilie the expansion unit (pixel graphics) i n order t o be processed.

W26:

ERROR in command structure!

/26

Siemens AG C79000-88576-U 17-0 1

A-5

CP 526 Error Messages

Appendix A

W27:

Displayed process data invalid!

If programs are deleted or overwritten i n the RAM memory module of the C 526 by COM, the process displayed is n o longer updated. P
W28:

CP 526 mode selector on STOP!

In this operating mode, n o values are accepted by or transmitted t o the controller.

W29:

CP 526 not synchronized with the controller!

There was no synchronization between the controller and CP 526.

W30:

Input value processed without error!

The current values i n the input fields were accepted by the controller free of error. This is an acknowledgement message and does not indicate an error.

W31:

Bar diagram incorrectly configured! /31

This error occurs when you d o not observe the following relations when defining the bar diagram: Smallest scale value Ilower limit 5 reference value 5 upper limit Ilargest output value Largest output value = smallest output value + index of t h e length * step width These values can also be transferred indirectly into a data block (DB).

W32:

Illegal bar value in controller! /32

A measured value represented as a bar lies outside the defined range (i.e., spallest output value, largest output value.) When displayed, i t is shown as the smallest or the largest output value. . 3 . '

Siemens .4G C79000-B8576-U 17-01

Appendix A

CP 526 Error Messages

W33:

Bar chart incorrectly configured!

/33

If message W31 appears, the bar chart cannot be updated. You must make changes in the bar chart before updating can take place.

W34:

Curve diagram incorrectly configured!

/34

This is the same error as message W31. In addition, the error can be caused by incorrect curve definitions. The following relations apply for the curve window: . Smallest scale value 5 lower limit Ireference value Iupper limit P largest output value
L'

Largest output value = smallest output value + X * step width of the y-axis, where X depends on the following windoWsizes: window sizes 80 by 22 and 80 by 1 1 mean: window sizes 40 by 22,40 by 11 and 26 by 11 mean: The following must hold for each curve: Smallest output value < largest output value. X=4 X =2
,
: 1

"

' h

W35:

Illegal curve value in controller!

Like message W32, only the measured value is shown as a curve.
:"'a
\
-*

W36:

Curve diagram incorrectly configured!

d

Like message W34, only the measured value is shown as a curve.

W40:

Curves / bars not updated!

. J

The planned updating time for curve windows cannot be adhered to.
.,
L

W41:

Overflow in CP 526 message buffer!

Since the last acknowledgement, the controller has transmitted more then 100 messages, so that further messages are lost. Call the message display and acknowledge.

Siemens AG C79000-88576-6217-01

A-7

CP S26 Error Messages

Appendix A

W42:

ERR0R:Illegal c o n t r o l l e r keyboard code!

Because of a SEND-DIRECT 219 function, key codes sent from the .contpller do not f i t into the input field, or are not understood by the CP 526.
Input command processed without e r r o r !

W60:

The value associated with the input command was entered by the controller without error. This is an acknowledgement message and does not indicate an error.

Messages WOS, W06, W07 W08, ~ 0 9 , ' ~ 1 W,i3, W24 and W26, indicate 2 internal errors of the CP 526, or COM errors i n th,eeS5-DOSapplication programs. If any of these errors occur please contact the nearest Siemens office and inform them of the error. This will assist us in improving the CP 526lCOM product.

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-C217-01

Appendix B

Reference literature

Appendix B:

Reference Literature

It is recommended that you have the following books that support the" CP 526. Order from your local Siemens representative unless othennriselindicated-

STEP 5 Language Primer (Publication No. 05-0 19-03-1285) Order from: Siemens Energy &Automation, Inc. Programmable Controls Division : -.< I 10 Technology Dr. Peabody, MA 0 1960 USA Programming of Control Systems in STEP 5 Volume 7 - Basic Software (Order No. A 19100-L531-F 100-X-7600) ' ' . - , - + T
c 1 -

'. l;+
*';
4

, T- i t .
'>
L ,

.-

>

! ,

%,

- P

. ,' ._ .
J

,
i

Programming o f control Systems in STEP 5 Volume 3 - Programming o f Function Blocks (Order No. A 79 7 00-L531-F 15-X-7600) Order Volumes 1 and 3 of Programmingo f Control Systems in STEP5from: SiemensAG ZVW 85, Lager 8510 Fuerth-Bislohe Federal Republic of Germany

Reference Literature

Appendix B

For information about data handling between the communications processor (CP) and the programmable controller (PC),see the following books: 55- 135U Programmable Controller Data Handling Blocks for the R Processor, Operating Instructions (Order No. C79000-B8576-C3661 SS- 150U Programmable Controller Data Handling Blocks, Operating Instructions (Order No. P72 100-A0 1 16-X-0 1- 19) SS- 1 15U Manual (Order No. 6ES5 998-OUF22)

Siemens AG C79000-B8576-U 17-0 1